E
Advanced User Guide
2
Introduction
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, rst read the “Safety
Instructions” (
=
30) and “Handling Precautions” (
=
33). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come
out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store this
manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images
cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held
liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images
recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the
memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment. Also be aware
that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
3
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack LP-E12
(with protective cover)
Battery
Charger
LC-E12/
LC-E12E
Strap
z
The camera does not come with a memory card (
=
11), interface cable, or HDMI
cable.
z
For details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see “Instruction
Manuals” (
=
4).
z
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
z
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
z
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (
=
4).
z
The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF les) are for lenses sold individually. Note
that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with the
lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
4
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides
basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions.
The Advanced User Guide (this PDF le), which provides
complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon
website to a computer or other device.
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF les) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or
other device.
Download site
Advanced User Guide/Supplemental Information
www.canon.com/icpd
Lens Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
Software Instruction Manual
www.canon.com/icpd
z
To view the PDF les, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is required.
z
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
z
Double-click the downloaded PDF le to open it.
z
To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section
or the like.
5
Instruction Manuals
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
Using QR Code
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF les) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR
code.
www.canon.com/icpd
z
A software app is required to read the QR code.
z
Select your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User
Guide/Instruction Manuals.
z
Select [
5
: Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera
screen.
6
Quick Start Guide
1
Insert the battery (
=
46).
z
Upon purchase, charge the battery
to start using (
=
44).
2
Insert the card (
=
48).
z
With the card’s label facing toward
the back of the camera, insert it
into the card slot.
3
Attach the lens (
=
54).
z
Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on
the camera to attach the lens.
z
Remove the lens cap.
4
(
1
)
(
2
)
Prepare to shoot.
z
Press (1) as you turn (2) slightly,
and then release (1).
z
Turn (2) a little more until it clicks.
7
Quick Start Guide
5
Turn the camera on (
=
52).
6
Set the shooting mode switch
to <
A
> (
=
74).
z
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
7
Focus on the subject (
=
59).
z
[
p
] (an AF point) appears over any
face detected.
z
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
8
Take the picture (
=
59).
z
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
9
About This Manual
Icons in this Manual
<
6
> : Indicates the dial.
<
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> : Indicates the corresponding direction on the <
V
>
cross keys.
<
Q
> <
0
> : Indicates the Quick Control/Setting button.
* : Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the
operation for the button you pressed, as timed after
you release the button.
y
In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant
operations and functionality.
M
: A
M
icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is
available only in advanced shooting modes ([
d
], [
s
], [
f
],
or [
a
]) or [
k
] movie modes ([
k
] or [
M
]).
=
*** : Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
10
About This Manual
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample
Photos
z
Instructions apply to the camera with the power on (
=
52).
z
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to
their defaults.
z
Screens in instructions show the state with [Menu display] in [
j
:
Display level settings] set to [Guided].
z
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the EF-
M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM lens as an example.
z
The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are
for instructional purposes only.
z
In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount
adapter is used.
11
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity.
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (
=
435).
z
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance
(fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size. For
details, see
=
500.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
13
Introduction 2
Item Check List ......................................................................................3
Instruction Manuals ................................................................................4
Quick Start Guide ...................................................................................6
About This Manual .................................................................................9
Compatible Cards ................................................................................11
Chapters...............................................................................................12
Contents ...............................................................................................13
Contents by Purpose ...........................................................................23
Index to Features .................................................................................26
Safety Instructions ...............................................................................30
Handling Precautions ...........................................................................33
Part Names ..........................................................................................36
Preparation and Basic Operations 43
Charging the Battery ............................................................................44
Inserting/Removing the Battery ............................................................46
Inserting/Removing the Card ...............................................................48
Using the Screen .................................................................................51
Turning on the Power ...........................................................................52
Attaching/Detaching a Lens .................................................................54
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses .................................................56
Basic Operations ..................................................................................58
Setting the Screen Display Level .........................................................62
Menu Operations and Settings ............................................................65
Contents
14
Contents
Touch-Screen Operation ......................................................................70
Quick Control .......................................................................................71
Basic Shooting Modes 73
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic) ...........................74
Special Scene Mode ............................................................................82
Self Portrait Mode ................................................................................84
Portrait Mode........................................................................................85
Smooth Skin Mode ...............................................................................86
Landscape Mode .................................................................................87
Sports Mode .........................................................................................88
Close-up Mode .....................................................................................89
Food Mode ...........................................................................................90
Night Portrait Mode ..............................................................................91
Handheld Night Scene Mode ...............................................................92
HDR Backlight Control Mode ...............................................................93
Silent Mode ..........................................................................................94
Special Scene Mode Precautions ........................................................95
Creative Filters Mode ...........................................................................98
Advanced Shooting Modes 105
Program AE Mode (P) ........................................................................106
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv).............................................................108
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av) ..........................................................11 0
Manual Exposure Mode (M) ............................................................... 112
15
Contents
Shooting Settings 117
Still Photo Shooting 118
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting ........................................................11 9
Image Quality .....................................................................................124
Still Image Aspect Ratio .....................................................................127
Image Review Time............................................................................129
Lens Aberration Correction ................................................................130
Drive Mode .........................................................................................135
Self-Timer ...........................................................................................137
Exposure Compensation ....................................................................139
ISO Speed Settings ...........................................................................140
Auto Lighting Optimizer ......................................................................143
Highlight Tone Priority ........................................................................144
Metering Mode ...................................................................................145
Metering Timer ...................................................................................147
Exposure Simulation ..........................................................................148
White Balance ....................................................................................149
White Balance Correction ..................................................................154
Color Space .......................................................................................155
Picture Style Selection .......................................................................156
Picture Style Customization ...............................................................159
Picture Style Registration ...................................................................162
Long Exposure Noise Reduction .......................................................164
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction ......................................................165
Touch Shutter .....................................................................................167
16
Contents
AF Operation ......................................................................................169
AF Method..........................................................................................172
Eye Detection AF ...............................................................................182
Continuous AF ...................................................................................183
Focus Mode .......................................................................................184
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF ............................................185
AF-Assist Beam Firing .......................................................................186
Manual Focus.....................................................................................187
Setting MF Peaking ............................................................................189
Image Stabilization .............................................................................190
Exposure Lock (AE Lock) ..................................................................191
Type of Digest Movie .........................................................................192
Remote Control Shooting ...................................................................193
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions ...............................................194
Movie Recording 197
Tab Menus: Movie Recording ............................................................198
Movie Mode........................................................................................200
Movie Recording Quality ....................................................................207
Movie Self-Timer ................................................................................214
Sound Recording ...............................................................................215
Time-lapse Movies .............................................................................217
Video Snapshots ................................................................................226
Miniature Eect Movie ........................................................................231
Movie Servo AF ..................................................................................233
Movie Digital IS ..................................................................................235
17
Contents
Other Menu Functions .......................................................................237
General Movie Recording Cautions ...................................................242
Flash Photography 245
Flash Photography .............................................................................246
Flash Exposure Compensation ..........................................................248
FE Lock ..............................................................................................249
Flash Control ......................................................................................250
Playback Settings 255
Tab Menus: Playback Settings ...........................................................256
Image Playback .................................................................................258
Magnied Image Display ....................................................................261
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) ..............................................262
Movie Playback ..................................................................................263
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................266
Frame Extraction ................................................................................268
Digest Movie Editing ..........................................................................270
Playback on a TV Set .........................................................................272
Protect Images ...................................................................................274
Rotate Still Photos .............................................................................277
Change Movie Orientation Information ..............................................278
Erase Images .....................................................................................279
Prepare to Print ..................................................................................283
Print Images .......................................................................................285
18
Contents
Print Ordering .....................................................................................286
Photobook Set-up ..............................................................................290
Creative Filters ...................................................................................293
Creative Assist ...................................................................................296
Red-Eye Correction............................................................................298
Create Album .....................................................................................299
Cropping.............................................................................................302
Resizing .............................................................................................304
Rating .................................................................................................305
Slide Shows .......................................................................................308
Set Image Search Conditions ............................................................310
Image Jump by Swiping .....................................................................312
Playback Information Display .............................................................314
AF Point Display.................................................................................316
View from Last Seen ..........................................................................317
Wireless Settings 319
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings ............................................................320
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection ...........................................321
Connecting to a Smartphone .............................................................323
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi ..................................................351
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi .......................................................359
Sending Images to a Web Service .....................................................369
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points ..................................................384
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control .........................................389
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi ......................................................................392
19
Contents
Registering Multiple Connection Settings ..........................................394
Wi-Fi Settings .....................................................................................395
Bluetooth Settings ..............................................................................396
Changing the Nickname .....................................................................397
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices ......... 398
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings ........................................401
Airplane Mode ....................................................................................403
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default ......................404
View Info Screen ................................................................................405
Virtual Keyboard Operations ..............................................................406
Responding to Error Messages .........................................................407
Wireless Communication Function Notes ..........................................418
Security ..............................................................................................420
Checking Network Settings ................................................................421
Wireless Communication Status ........................................................422
Function Settings 425
Tab Menus: Function Settings ............................................................426
Select Folder ......................................................................................428
File Numbering ...................................................................................430
Auto Rotate ........................................................................................433
Adding Orientation Information to Movies ..........................................434
Format Card .......................................................................................435
Eco Mode ...........................................................................................437
Power Saving .....................................................................................438
Display Brightness .............................................................................439
20
Contents
Date/Time/Zone .................................................................................440
Language ...........................................................................................443
Shutter Button Function for Movies ....................................................444
Video System .....................................................................................445
Touch Control .....................................................................................446
Screen Autolock Settings ...................................................................447
Beeping ..............................................................................................448
HDMI Resolution ................................................................................449
HDMI HDR Output .............................................................................450
Shooting Information Display .............................................................451
Reverse Display .................................................................................453
Display Performance ..........................................................................454
Reset Camera ....................................................................................455
Copyright Information .........................................................................456
Manual/Software URL ........................................................................458
Certication Logo Display ..................................................................458
Firmware ............................................................................................458
Custom Functions (C.Fn) 459
Setting Custom Functions ..................................................................460
Custom Function Setting Items ..........................................................461
21
Contents
My Menu 465
Tab Menus: My Menu .........................................................................466
Registering My Menu .........................................................................467
Reference 473
Software .............................................................................................474
Importing Images to a Computer .......................................................476
Household Power Outlet Accessory ...................................................478
Troubleshooting Guide .......................................................................479
Error Codes ........................................................................................495
Performance Data ..............................................................................496
Information Display ............................................................................503
Index ..................................................................................................514
22
23
Contents by Purpose
Shooting
z
Shoot automatically
=
73–
=
103 (Basic
shooting modes)
z
Shoot continuously
=
135 (
i
Continuous
shooting)
z
Take a picture of yourself in a
group
=
137 (
j
Self-timer)
z
Freeze the action
z
Blur the action
=
108 (
s
Shutter-priority AE)
z
Shoot with eects of your choice
=
80 (Creative Assist)
z
Blur the background
z
Keep the background in sharp
focus
=
110 (
f
Aperture-priority
AE)
z
Adjust the image brightness
(exposure)
=
139 (Exposure
compensation)
z
Shoot in low light
=
246 (
I
Flash photography)
=
140 (ISO speed settings)
z
Shoot without ash
=
251 (
b
Flash o)
z
Shoot reworks at night
=
114 (Bulb exposure)
z
Shoot with creative eects
=
98 (Creative lters)
z
Take a Self Portrait
=
84 (
J
Self Portrait)
z
Record movies
=
197 (
k
Movie recording)
24
Contents by Purpose
Image Quality
z
Shoot with image eects matching
the subject
=
156 (Picture Style selection)
z
Make a large-size print of the
picture
=
124 (
73
,
83
,
1
,
F
)
z
Take a lot of pictures
=
124 (
7
a
,
8
a
,
b
)
AF (Focusing)
z
Change the point of focus
=
174 (AF method)
z
Shoot a moving subject
=
170 (Servo AF)
=
88 (
5
Sports)
Playback
z
View photos or movies on the
camera
=
258 (
x
Playback)
z
Find photos or movies quickly
=
262 (Index display)
=
312 (Image jump with
i
)
=
310 (Set image search
conditions)
z
Rate images
=
305 (Rating)
z
Protect important photos or
movies from accidental erasure
=
274 (
K
Protect images)
z
Erase unneeded photos or movies
=
279 (
L
Erase images)
z
Auto play back photos and movies
=
308 (Slide shows)
z
View photos and movies on a TV set
=
272 (Playback on a TV set)
z
Adjust the screen brightness
=
439 (Screen brightness)
z
Apply special eect to images
=
293 (Creative lters)
26
Index to Features
Power
z
Charging the battery (
=
44)
z
Battery level (
=
53)
z
Eco mode (
=
437)
z
Power saving (
=
438)
Cards
z
Formatting (
=
435)
z
Cards compatible with movie
recording (
=
499)
Lens
z
Attaching (
=
54,
=
56)
z
Detaching (
=
55,
=
57)
z
Release shutter without lens (
=
463)
Basic Settings
z
Date/Time/Zone (
=
440)
z
Language (
=
443)
z
Video system (
=
445)
z
Beeper (
=
448)
z
Clearing all camera settings
(
=
455)
z
Copyright information (
=
456)
Screen
z
Tilting (
=
51)
z
Touch control (
=
70)
z
Brightness (
=
439)
z
Screen autolock settings (
=
447)
z
Display performance (
=
454)
AF
z
AF operation (
=
169)
z
AF method (
=
172)
z
AF point selection (
=
177)
z
Eye Detection AF (
=
182)
z
Continuous AF (
=
183)
z
Electronic manual focus (
=
185)
z
AF-assist beam (
=
186)
z
Manual focusing (
=
187)
z
MF peaking settings (
=
189)
Metering
z
Metering mode (
=
145)
Drive
z
Maximum burst (
=
126)
z
Drive mode (
=
135)
z
Self-timer (
=
137)
Image Recording Settings
z
Creating/Selecting a folder
(
=
428)
z
File numbering (
=
430)
27
Index to Features
Image Quality
z
Image quality (
=
124)
z
Still image aspect ratio (
=
127)
z
Lens aberration correction
(
=
130)
z
ISO speed (still photos) (
=
140)
z
Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
143)
z
Highlight tone priority (
=
144)
z
White balance (
=
149)
z
Color space (
=
155)
z
Picture Style (
=
156)
z
Noise reduction for long exposures
(
=
164)
z
Noise reduction for high ISO
speeds (
=
165)
Shooting
z
Shooting mode (
=
38)
z
Quick Control (
=
71)
z
Creative Assist (
=
80)
z
Creative lters (
=
98)
z
Depth-of-eld preview (
=
111)
z
Touch shutter (
=
167)
z
Magnied view (
=
179)
z
Remote control (
=
193)
z
Shooting information display
(
=
451)
z
Grid display (
=
451)
z
Reverse display (
=
453)
z
Error codes (
=
495)
Exposure
z
Exposure compensation with
M+ISO Auto (
=
113)
z
Exposure compensation (
=
139)
z
Exposure simulation (
=
148)
z
AE lock (
=
191)
z
Safety shift (
=
461)
Flash
z
Flash (
=
246)
z
Flash exposure compensation
(
=
248)
z
FE lock (
=
249)
z
Built-in ash function settings
(
=
253)
28
Index to Features
Movie Recording
z
Autoexposure recording (
=
200)
z
Manual exposure recording
(
=
202)
z
Movie recording size (
=
207)
z
Sound recording (
=
215)
z
Wind lter (
=
215)
z
Attenuator (
=
216)
z
Time-lapse movie (
=
217)
z
Video snapshot (
=
226)
z
Movie Servo AF (
=
233)
z
Remote control shooting (
=
237)
z
ISO speed (movie) (
=
238)
z
HDMI output (
=
240)
z
Auto slow shutter (
=
241)
z
Adding rotation information
(
=
434)
z
Shutter button function for movies
(
=
444)
Playback
z
Image review time (
=
129)
z
Single-image display (
=
258)
z
Touch playback (
=
260)
z
Magnied view (
=
261)
z
Index display (
=
262)
z
Movie playback (
=
263)
z
Editing a movie’s rst and last
scenes (
=
266)
z
Frame Grab (4K) (
=
268)
z
Viewing images on a television
(
=
272)
z
Protect (
=
274)
z
Image rotation (
=
277)
z
Erasing (
=
279)
z
Rating (
=
305)
z
Slide show (
=
308)
z
Setting image search conditions
(
=
310)
z
Image browsing (Jump display)
(
=
312)
z
Playback information display
(
=
314)
z
AF point display (
=
316)
z
Auto rotate (
=
433)
z
HDMI resolution (
=
449)
z
HDR output (
=
450)
z
Shooting information display
(
=
508)
29
Index to Features
Image Editing
z
Creative lters (
=
293)
z
Red-eye correction (
=
298)
z
Video snapshot album (
=
299)
z
Cropping JPEGs (
=
302)
z
Resizing JPEGs (
=
304)
Print Ordering
z
Print order (DPOF) (
=
286)
z
Photobook Set-up (
=
290)
Customization
z
Display level settings (
=
62)
z
Custom Functions (C.Fn) (
=
460)
z
My Menu (
=
467)
Software
z
Downloading and Installing
(
=
474)
z
Software Instruction Manuals
(
=
475)
Wireless Features
z
Connect to smartphones (
=
323)
z
Auto send images to smartphones
(
=
337)
z
Remote control (EOS Utility)
(
=
351)
z
Auto send images to computers
(
=
356)
z
Print from Wi-Fi printers (
=
359)
z
Upload to Web service (
=
369)
z
Connect to a wireless remote
control (
=
389)
z
Geotagging Images (
=
398)
z
Clear wireless settings (
=
404)
30
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING:
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
z
Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if
swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical
assistance.
z
Use only power sources specied in this instruction manual for use with the product.
z
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
z
Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
z
Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
z
Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence
of smoke or a strange smell.
z
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
z
Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
z
Do not use the product where ammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
z
Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the
lens cap attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause re.
z
Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
z
Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
y
Use batteries/battery packs only with their specied product.
y
Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to re.
y
Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
y
Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
y
Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
y
When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing,
ush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact,
ush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek
immediate medical assistance.
31
Safety Instructions
z
Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
y
Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
y
Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
y
Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
y
Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
z
Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
z
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
z
Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use
when the product is still warm in temperature.
z
Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
z
Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
z
Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 - 40 °C
(41 - 104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
z
Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and
blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar
equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people
with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
z
Follow any indications to turn o the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the eect of
electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
32
Safety Instructions
CAUTION:
Denotes the risk of injury.
z
Do not re the ash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
z
Do not look at the screen or through the viewnder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using
the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
z
Flash emits high temperatures when red. Keep ngers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the ash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the ash.
z
Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when
touched.
z
Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product
attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the
product or expose the product to strong impacts.
z
Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
z
Only mount the product on a tripod that is suciently sturdy.
z
Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
z
Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
z
If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this
product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.
33
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
z
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to
physical shock.
z
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If the
camera gets wet, contact a Canon Service Center immediately. Wipe o
any water droplets with a clean, dry cloth, and if the camera is exposed
to salty air, wipe it o with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
z
Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
z
Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
z
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic eld
such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the
camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large
antenna. Strong magnetic elds can cause camera malfunction or
destroy image data.
z
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
z
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
z
Do not block the built-in ash or shutter curtain operations with your
nger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
z
Use a commercially available blower brush to remove dust from the
lens or other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to
clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the
nearest Canon Service Center.
z
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your ngers. This is
to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause
camera malfunction.
z
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, rst put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust
to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
34
Handling Precautions
z
If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the
camera or remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera o and wait
until the moisture has fully evaporated before resuming use.
Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not
remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the
ambient temperature.
z
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while
the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a
while to check that the camera is still working.
z
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust
and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
z
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its
functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time
or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have
the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the
camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
z
The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still
photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
z
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
Screen
z
Although the screen is manufactured with very high precision technology
with over 99.99% eective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be
dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is
not a malfunction. They do not aect the images recorded.
z
If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few
days.
z
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
35
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
z
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
z
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your ngers or anything
metallic.
z
Do not ax any stickers, etc. on the card.
z
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic
eld, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone
to having static electricity.
z
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
z
Store the card in a case.
z
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Smudges on the Image Sensor
z
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.
If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a Canon
Service Center.
Lens
z
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down
the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens
cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical
contacts (1).
(1)
36
Part Names
(
7
)
(
8
)(
6
)
(
18
)
(
17
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
22
)
(
12
)
(
9
)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
13
)
(
19
) (
20
) (
21
)
(
16
)
(
15
)
(
14
)
(1) Shutter button
(2) <
6
> Dial
(3) EF-M lens mount index
(4) Image sensor
(5) Contacts
(6) Power button
(7) Shooting mode switch
(8) Flash
(9) Strap mount
(10) <
I
> Flash up lever
(11) Terminal cover
(12) AF-assist beam/Red-eye
reduction/Self-timer/Remote
control lamp
(13) Card slot cover
(14) Lens release button
(15) Lens lock pin
(16) Lens mount
(17) <
k
> HDMI OUT terminal
(18) <
g
> Digital terminal
(19) Tripod socket
(20) DC coupler cord hole
(21) Battery compartment cover
(22) Body cap
37
Part Names
(
7
) (
12
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
8
)
(
10
)
(
1
)
(
11
)
(
9
)
(
3
) (
4
)
(
6
)
(
2
) (
5
)
(1) Screen
(2) <
V
> Focal plane mark
(3) Microphone
(4) Access lamp
(5) Speaker
(6) Serial number (body number)
(7) <
M
> Menu button
(8) <
W
/
O
/
L
> Up/Exposure
compensation/Erase button
(9) <
Y
/
A
> Left/AE lock/FE lock
button
(10) <
X
/
B
> Down/Info button
(11) <
x
> Playback button
(12) Movie shooting button
(13) <
Z
/
I
> Right/Flash button
(14) <
Q
/
0
> Quick Control/Setting
button
38
Part Names
Shooting Mode Switch/Shooting Modes
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
A
: Scene Intelligent Auto Mode (
=
74)
All you do is press the shutter button. Fully automatic shooting, with settings
determined by the camera.
(2)
z
: Still Photo Mode
For still photo shooting. You can let the camera determine settings for the
subject or scene, or you can take more control over shooting. To select a
shooting mode, you can tap a shooting mode icon in the upper left of the
shooting screen. Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a shooting mode, then
press <
0
>.
Advanced Shooting Modes
d
Program AE (
=
106)
s
Shutter-priority AE (
=
108)
f
Aperture-priority AE (
=
110)
a
Manual exposure (
=
112)
D
: Hybrid Auto Mode (
=
74)
39
Part Names
Special Scene Mode
J
Self Portrait (
=
84)
P
Food (
=
90)
2
Portrait (
=
85)
6
Night Portrait (
=
91)
K
Smooth skin (
=
86)
F
Handheld Night Scene
(
=
92)
3
Landscape (
=
87)
G
HDR Backlight Control
(
=
93)
5
Sports (
=
88)
I
Silent Mode (
=
94)
4
Close-up (
=
89)
Creative Filters Mode (
=
98)
I
Grainy B/W (
=
100)
c
Miniature eect (
=
101)
G
Soft focus (
=
100)
A
HDR art standard (
=
101)
X
Fish-eye eect (
=
100)
B
HDR art vivid (
=
101)
K
Water painting eect
(
=
100)
C
HDR art bold (
=
101)
H
Toy camera eect (
=
100)
D
HDR art embossed (
=
101)
(3)
k
: Movie Mode
For movie recording. To select a shooting mode, you can tap a shooting
mode icon in the upper left of the shooting screen. Press the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys to select a shooting mode, then press <
0
>.
k
Movie auto exposure (
=
200)
M
Movie manual exposure (
=
202)
40
Part Names
Battery Charger LC-E12
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E12 (
=
44).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Power plug
(2) Charge lamp
(3) Full-charge lamp
(4) Battery pack slot
Battery Charger LC-E12E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E12 (
=
44).
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Battery pack slot
(2) Full-charge lamp
(3) Charge lamp
(4) Power cord
(5) Power cord socket
41
Part Names
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
42
4343
Preparation and Basic
Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting
and the basic camera operations.
44
Charging the Battery
1
Detach the protective cover
provided with the battery.
2
Fully insert the battery into the
charger.
z
Do the opposite to remove the battery.
LC-E12
(2)
(1)
LC-E12E
3
Recharge the battery.
For LC-E12
z
As shown by the arrow, ip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert the
prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E12E
z
Connect the power cord to the charger
and insert the plug into a power outlet.
z
Recharging starts automatically and the
charge lamp (1) lights up in orange.
z
When the battery is fully recharged, the
full-charge lamp (2) will light up in green.
z
It takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge
a completely exhausted battery at
room temperature (23°C/73°F). The
time required to charge the battery will
vary greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery’s remaining
capacity.
z
For safety reasons, charging in low
temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F) will
take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
45
Charging the Battery
z
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
z
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to
be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its
capacity.
z
After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
z
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery performance.
z
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery
charger.
z
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having
been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its
service life.
Purchase a new battery.
z
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 5 sec.
z
The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-
E12.
46
Inserting/Removing the Battery
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12 into the camera.
Insertion
1
Slide the battery compartment
cover to open it.
2
Insert the battery.
z
Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
z
Insert the battery until it locks in place.
3
Close the cover.
z
Slide the cover until it snaps shut.
z
You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E12.
z
After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back
any further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
47
Inserting/Removing the Battery
Removal
(
1
)
1
Open the battery compartment
cover.
z
Turn the camera o.
z
Check that the access lamp (1) is o,
then open the cover.
2
Remove the battery.
z
Press the battery lock lever as shown by
the arrow and remove the battery.
z
To prevent short-circuits, always attach
the included protective cover (
=
44)
to the battery.
48
Inserting/Removing the Card
The captured images are recorded onto the card.
z
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
1
Open the card slot cover.
(1)
2
Insert the card.
z
Insert the card with the label facing
the back of the camera until it clicks in
place.
3
Close the cover.
49
Inserting/Removing the Card
Removal
(
1
)
1
Open the cover.
z
Turn the camera o.
z
Check that the access lamp (1) is o,
then open the cover.
z
If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen,
close the cover.
2
Remove the card.
z
Gently push in the card, then let it go to
eject.
z
Pull the card straight out, then close the
cover.
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera (
=
435).
z
The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of
the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
50
Inserting/Removing the Card
z
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being
written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred.
Do not open the card slot cover or remove the battery at this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.
Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
y
Removing the card.
y
Removing the battery.
y
Shaking or striking the camera.
y
Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power outlet
accessories (sold separately) are used).
z
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start
from 0001 (
=
430).
z
If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert
the card. If the error persists, use a dierent card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images
and then format the card with the camera (
=
435). The card may then return
to normal.
z
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your ngers or metal objects. Do not
expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts,
contact failure may result.
z
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
51
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
Tilting the Screen Upward
z
The screen lifts upward and opens to
about 180°.
z
When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
z
When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
z
Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the camera.
52
Turning on the Power
To turn the camera on, press the power
button. Press it again to turn the camera
o.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
If you turn on the power and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see
=
440 to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see
=
443.
z
[Saving...] is displayed if you turn o the camera during image recording to the
card, and the camera will turn o after recording is nished.
53
Turning on the Power
Battery Level Indicator
: Battery level is sucient.
: Battery level is low, but the camera
can still be used.
: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
: Charge the battery.
z
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
y
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
y
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
y
Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
y
Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
z
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
z
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses may
exhaust the battery faster than others.
z
In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a
sucient battery level.
54
Attaching/Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
z
Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
2
Attach the lens.
z
Align the white mount index on the
lens with the white mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
3
Remove the front lens cap.
55
Attaching/Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
(
3
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
z
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach
it.
z
Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
z
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of
vision.
z
Turn o the camera before attaching or detaching lenses.
z
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not
touch the rotating part.
z
Shooting angle of view
- Because the image area is smaller than 35mm lm format, the eective angle
of view corresponds to approx. 1.6 times the lens’s indicated focal length.
Image area (approx.) (22.3×14.9 mm/0.88×0.59 in.)
35mm lm format (36×24 mm/1.42×0.94 in.)
z
For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual
(
=
4).
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body
cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
56
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
z
Remove the caps on the lens, adapter,
and body.
(
1
)
(
2
)
2
Attach the lens to the adapter.
z
Align the red or white mount index on
the lens with the corresponding mount
index on the adapter and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
(1) Red index
(2) White index
(
3
)
3
Attach the adapter to the camera.
z
Align the white mount indexes (3) on the
adapter and camera and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
57
Attaching/Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
4
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
z
<AF> stands for autofocus.
z
<MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
5
Remove the front lens cap.
Detaching the Lens
1
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the adapter as shown
by the arrow.
z
Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
2
Detach the lens from the adapter.
z
Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
z
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach
it.
z
Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
z
For lens precautions, see
=
55.
z
When using a lens that is heavier than the camera, hold the camera by the lens
when you shoot or carry it.
z
With EF lenses that incorporate a tripod mount (such as super telephoto
lenses), attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the lens. When using lenses
without a tripod mount, attach the tripod to the tripod mount on the mount
adapter.
59
Basic Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway.
Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture value) is displayed for approx. 8
sec. or as set for the metering timer.*
* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Pressing Completely
This action shoots.
z
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
z
Hold the camera steady.
z
Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
z
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway rst, or if
you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately,
the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
z
Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to shooting-
ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
60
Basic Operations
<
6
> Dial
While looking at the screen, turn the <
6
>
dial.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture value, etc.
61
Basic Operations
INFO Button
Each press of the <
B
> button changes
the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still
photos.
62
Setting the Screen Display Level
You can set how information is displayed on the screen according to your
preference. Change the settings as necessary.
1
Display the main tabs.
z
Press the <
M
> button to display the
main tabs.
2
Select the [j] tab.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys of the cross
keys to select the [
j
] tab.
63
Setting the Screen Display Level
Menu Display
You can select the display type from [Guided] or [Standard]. If you set
[Guided], main tab descriptions are provided when you press the <
M
>
button. If you set [Standard], the menu screen is displayed immediately
after you press the <
M
> button. By default, it is set to [Guided].
1
Select [Menu display].
2
Select the display type.
(
1
)
(1) Main tabs
z
When [Guided] is set, the [
9
(My Menu)] tab does not appear. To set My
Menu (
=
467), change the menu display level to [Standard].
64
Setting the Screen Display Level
Feature Guide
A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use
Quick Control or menu settings. By default, it is set to [Enable].
1
Select [Feature guide].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Sample screens
Quick Control screen Menu screen
(
1
) (
1
)
(1) Feature guide
z
To clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.
65
Menu Operations and Settings
(
5
)(
4
)
(
3
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(1) <
M
> button
(2) Screen
(3) <
V
> Cross keys
(4) <
0
> button
(5) Dial
Menu Screen
<
A
> mode Movie mode
Still photo mode (in advanced shooting modes)
z
The menu tabs and items displayed vary depending on the shooting mode.
66
Menu Operations and Settings
Menu Setting Procedure
z
With [
j
: Menu display] set to [Guided]
(
1
)
1
Display the main tabs.
z
When you press the <
M
> button,
the main tabs (1) and a description of
the selected tab will appear.
2
Select a main tab.
z
Each time you press the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys of the cross keys, the main tab
(group of functions) will switch.
z
You can also select by turning the <
6
>
dial.
3
Display the menu screen.
z
Press <
0
> to display the menu
screen.
z
To return to the main tab screen, press
the <
M
> button.
4
Select a secondary tab.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys of the cross
keys to select a secondary tab.
z
You can also select by turning the <
6
>
dial.
5
Select a setting item.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys of the cross
keys to select the item, then press
<
0
>.
67
Menu Operations and Settings
6
Select an option.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> or <
Y
> <
Z
> keys
of the cross keys to select the desired
option. (Some options are selected with
the <
W
> and <
X
> keys, and others are
selected with the <
Y
> and <
Z
> keys.)
z
The current setting is indicated in blue.
7
Set an option.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
z
If you change the setting from the
default, it will be indicated in blue
(available only for the menu items under
the [
z
] tab).
8
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button twice to exit
the menu and return to shooting-ready
state.
z
In steps 2 to 8, you can also tap on the screen to perform the operation
(
=
70).
z
The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that the menu screen is
displayed.
z
To cancel the operation, press the <
M
> button.
68
Menu Operations and Settings
z
With [
j
: Menu display
] set to [
Standard]
(
1
)
1
Display the menu screen.
z
Press the <
M
> button to display the
menu screen.
2
Select a tab.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
main tab (1) and secondary tab.
z
You can also select by turning the <
6
>
dial.
z
After this, operations are the same
as when [
j
: Menu display] is set
to [Guided]. See “Menu Setting
Procedure” (
=
66), starting with step
5.
z
To exit the setting, press the <
M
>
button.
69
Menu Operations and Settings
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <
0
>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will become
settable.
z
You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
z
[Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera] enables you to restore menu functions
to default settings (
=
455).
70
Touch-Screen Operation
You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touch-
screen panel) with your nger.
Tap
Sample screen (Quick Control)
z
Use your nger to tap on (touch briey
and then remove your nger from) the
screen.
z
For example, when you tap on [
Q
],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [
2
], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Drag
Sample screen (Menu screen)
z
Slide your nger while touching the
screen.
z
If [
5
: Beep] is set to [Touch
], the beep will not sound for touch operations
(
=
448).
z
Touch control responsiveness can be adjusted (
=
446).
71
Quick Control
You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is
called Quick Control (except in [
A
] mode).
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
2
Select a setting item.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys for selection.
z
When the screen at left is displayed,
press the <
W
> <
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> keys for
selection.
3
Select an option.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial, or press the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to change the setting. Some
items are set by pressing a button after
this.
z
Press <
0
> to nalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
z
You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (
=
70).
72
74
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully
Automatic)
[
A
] [
D
] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can adjust focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of
the subject.
With [
D
], you can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still
photos. The camera records 2–4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie (
=
192,
=
270).
1
Set the shooting mode switch to
<A>.
z
To use [
D
] mode, after setting the
shooting mode switch to <
z
>, tap the
upper left of the screen and press the
<
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
D
] mode,
then press <
0
>.
2
Aim the camera at what you will
shoot (the subject).
z
A frame may be displayed around the
subject, under some shooting conditions.
z
AF points are displayed over any faces
detected.
75
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
z
If [
D
] blinks, use the <
D
> lever to raise
the ash.
z
You can also focus by tapping a person’s
face or another subject on the screen
(Touch AF).
z
Under low light, the AF-assist beam
(
=
186) is automatically activated if
needed.
z
For stationary subjects, the AF point is
displayed in green when the subject is
in focus. The camera beeps at this time
(<
A
> mode only). (One-Shot AF)
z
For moving subjects, the AF point is
displayed in blue (<
A
> mode only) and
tracks subject movement. The camera
does not beep. (Servo AF)
4
Take the picture.
z
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
z
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
z
To retract the ash, push it down with
your ngers.
z
Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
76
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
z
AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press
the shutter button halfway. Even when automatically set to One-Shot AF, the
camera will switch to Servo AF if subject motion is detected while you are
pressing the shutter button halfway (<
A
> mode only).
z
The [
A
] mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you prefer other colors, switch to an advanced shooting
mode (
=
38) and select a Picture Style other than [
D
], then shoot again
(
=
156).
D
: Hybrid Auto
z
For more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
z
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in <
A
> mode, because digest movies
are recorded for each shot.
z
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still photo immediately after
turning the camera on, choosing <
D
> mode, or operating the camera in other
ways.
z
Any sounds and vibrations from your camera or lens operations will be
recorded in digest movies.
z
Digest movie image quality is
w6W
for NTSC or
w5W
for PAL.
This varies depending on the video system setting.
z
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the
self-timer.
z
Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following cases even if
they were recorded on the same day in <
D
> mode.
y
The digest movie recording time reaches approx. 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
(May also be saved as separate les if the size exceeds approx. 4 GB.)
y
The digest movie is protected.
y
Daylight saving time, video system, or time zone settings are changed.
z
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
77
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Minimizing Blurred Photos
z
Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
z
Using a wireless remote control (sold separately,
=
193) is
recommended.
FAQ
z
Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the camera at an area with good contrast, then press the shutter
button halfway (
=
59). If you are too close to the subject, move away
and shoot again.
z
Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions
are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can
take the picture.
z
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF>, set it to <AF>.
z
The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due
to camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
78
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the
focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button
pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
(<
A
> mode only)
After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the
camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the
subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
79
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Scene Icons
The camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the
scene. The detected scene type is indicated
on the upper left of the screen. For icon
details, see
=
507.
Adjusting Settings by Touching the Screen
By tapping icons on the screen, you can
adjust settings.
80
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
Shooting with Eects Applied (Creative Assist)
1
Press the <Q> button.
z
Read the message and select [OK].
2
Select an eect.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
eect, then press <
0
>.
3
Select the eect level and other
details.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
z
To reset the setting, press the <
A
>
button, then select [OK].
Creative Assist Eects
z
[
] Preset
Select one of the preset eects.
Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not
available with [B&W].
z
[ ] Background blur
Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds
sharper, or lower values to make them blurrier. [Auto] adjusts
background blurring to match the brightness. Depending on lens
brightness (f/number), some positions may not be available.
81
Scene Intelligent Auto/Hybrid Auto (Fully Automatic)
z
[ ] Brightness
Adjust image brightness.
z
[ ] Contrast
Adjust contrast.
z
[ ] Saturation
Adjust the vividness of colors.
z
[ ] Color tone 1
Adjust amber/blue color tone.
z
[ ] Color tone 2
Adjust green/magenta color tone.
z
[ ] Monochrome
Set the toning eect for monochrome shooting. Set to [O] to shoot in
color. [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available
with options other than [O].
z
[Background blur] is not available when the ash is used.
z
These settings are reset when you switch modes or turn the camera o. To
save the settings, set [
z
: Retain Creative Assist data] to [Enable].
Saving Eects
To save the current setting to the camera, tap [Register] on the Creative
Assist setting screen. Up to three presets can be saved as [USER*]. After
three have been saved, an existing [USER*] preset must be overwritten to
save a new one.
82
Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you
select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
1
Set the shooting mode switch to
<z>.
2
Tap the shooting mode icon.
3
Select a shooting mode.
z
Choose from [
J
], [
2
], [
K
], [
3
], [
5
],
[
4
], [
P
], [
6
], [
F
], [
G
], or [
I
].
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a
shooting mode, then press <
0
>.
z
You can also select by turning the <
6
>
dial.
z
Cautions on each shooting mode are listed together (
=
95). Read the
cautions before shooting.
z
You can also set the shooting mode in [
z
: Shooting mode].
z
Take some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the desired results.
84
Self Portrait Mode
To take shots of yourself, use [
J
] (Self Portrait) mode. Rotate the screen
around toward the lens. Customizable image processing includes skin
smoothing as well as brightness and background adjustment to make
yourself stand out.
Shooting Tips
z
Set the brightness and smooth skin eect.
[Brightness] and [Smooth skin eect] can be set in a range of ve
levels. In [Background], you can adjust the level of background blurring.
z
Tap on the screen to shoot.
Besides pressing the shutter button completely to shoot, you can also
shoot by tapping the screen, once you enable Touch Shutter by tapping
[
y
] to change it to [
x
].
z
You can also take shots of yourself in shooting modes other than [
J
] (except
[
I
] mode) by rotating the screen toward the front and tapping [
J
] in the
lower left.
85
Portrait Mode
The [
2
] (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject
stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
z
Select the location where the distance between the subject
and the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the more
blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better
against an uncluttered dark background.
z
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to ll the frame with the
subject from the waist up.
z
Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [
z
: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
z
Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [
i
] (Continuous shooting). If you keep holding
down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture changes
in the subject’s facial expression and pose.
86
Smooth Skin Mode
Use [
K
] (Smooth skin) mode to make skin look more attractive. Image
processing makes skin look smoother.
Shooting Tips
z
Enable the camera to detect faces.
Frames are displayed around any main subjects detected for skin
smoothing. For more eective skin smoothing, you can move closer to
or farther from the subject so that the frame is displayed on the subject’s
face.
z
Focus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [
z
: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
87
Landscape Mode
Use the [
3
] (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very
sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
z
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the
objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.
z
Keep the camera steady when shooting night scenes.
Shooting with [
3
] while handholding the camera may cause camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
88
Sports Mode
Use the [
5
] (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running
person or a moving vehicle.
(1)
Shooting Tips
z
Use a telephoto lens.
Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a
distance.
z
Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
By default, [
z
: AF method] is set to [
u
+Tracking]. An Area AF frame
(1) appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject
is in focus, the AF point turns blue.
z
Shoot continuously.
The default setting is [
i
] (Continuous shooting). At the decisive
moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot. To track
the subject and capture changes as it moves, keep holding down the
shutter button to shoot continuously.
89
Close-up Mode
When you want to shoot owers or small things up close, use the [
4
]
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro
lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
z
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as owers stand out
better.
z
Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <
V
> (focal plane) mark on the
top of the camera to the subject. Focusing is not possible if you are too
close.
z
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject
look larger.
90
Food Mode
When you want to take pictures of food, use [
P
] (Food). The photo will look
bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge
will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
z
Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge, set it
toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
91
Night Portrait Mode
When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking
night scene in the background, use the [
6
] (Night Portrait) mode. Note that
a ash is required for shooting. Using a tripod is recommended.
Shooting Tips
z
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night
view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with handheld shooting,
use a tripod.
z
Check the image brightness.
It is recommended to play back the captured image on location to check
the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and shoot
again.
z
Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with
[
A
] is recommended.
z
If you use the self-timer together with a ash, the self-timer lamp will light up
briey after the picture is taken.
92
Handheld Night Scene Mode
The [
F
] (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes
even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are
taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting image with reduced
camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
z
Hold the camera rmly.
During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, four
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
signicant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the nal image.
93
HDR Backlight Control Mode
When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the [
G
]
(HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode,
three consecutive shots are taken at dierent exposures. This results in one
image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped shadows
caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Shooting Tips
z
Hold the camera rmly.
During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, three
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
signicant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the nal image.
94
Silent Mode
Where silence is needed, you can shoot without beeps or shutter release
sounds. As you shoot, a white frame is momentarily displayed around the
screen.
Shooting Tips
z
Take some test shots.
Consider taking some test shots in advance, because lens aperture and
focusing adjustment may be audible under some shooting conditions.
95
Special Scene Mode Precautions
J
: Self Portrait
z
Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on the shooting
conditions.
z
[Smooth skin eect] settings specied in [
J
] mode are not applied in [
K
]
mode.
z
[Background] is set to [Auto] and cannot be changed in [
I
] ash mode when
you have raised the ash.
K
: Smooth skin
z
Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on the shooting
conditions.
z
Setting details in [
K
] mode are not applied in [
J
] mode.
3
: Landscape
z
Flash photography is not possible.
5
: Sports
z
Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in
the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
P
: Food
z
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
z
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
z
If you use a ash, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.
z
If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced properly.
6
: Night Portrait
z
Tell subjects to remain still for a moment after the ash res.
z
Focusing may be dicult when subject faces look dark. In this case, focus
manually by setting [
z
: Focus mode] to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode
switch to <MF> (
=
57,
=
184).
z
Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be dicult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, focus manually by setting [
z
: Focus mode]
to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> (
=
57,
=
184).
z
Shots will look slightly dierent from the image as displayed on the screen.
96
Special Scene Mode Precautions
6
: Night Portrait (continued)
z
When there is a risk of overexposure in ash photography, shutter speed or
ISO speed is automatically adjusted to reduce loss of detail in highlights and
shoot at standard exposure. In ash shots with certain lenses, shutter speeds
and ISO speeds displayed when you press the shutter button halfway may not
match the actual settings used. This may alter the brightness of backgrounds
that are out of ash range.
F
: Handheld Night Scene
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
RAW image quality cannot be set.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be dicult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, focus manually by setting [
z
: Focus mode]
to [MF] or setting the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> (
=
57,
=
184).
z
Shots will look slightly dierent from the image as displayed on the screen.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
97
Special Scene Mode Precautions
G
: HDR Backlight Control
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
RAW image quality cannot be set.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may
look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
HDR Backlight Control may not be eective for excessively backlit scenes or
extremely high-contrast scenes.
z
When shooting subjects that are suciently bright as they are, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR eect.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
I
: Silent Mode
z
Be responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy and
portrait rights.
z
Images of fast-moving subjects may look distorted.
z
Continuous shooting and ash photography are not available.
98
Creative Filters Mode
You can shoot with lter eects applied. You can preview lter eects before
shooting.
1
Set the shooting mode switch to
<z>.
2
Tap the shooting mode icon.
3
Select a lter eect (shooting
mode).
z
Choose from [
I
], [
G
], [
X
], [
K
], [
H
],
[
c
], [
A
], [
B
], [
C
], or [
D
].
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a
shooting mode, then press <
0
>.
z
You can also select by turning the <
6
>
dial.
z
The image is shown with the lter eect
applied.
4
Adjust the eect and shoot.
z
Press the <
Q
> button and select an
item in the upper left. (Not available for
[
c
], [
A
], [
B
], [
C
], or [
D
].)
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to adjust the
eect, then press <
0
>.
99
Creative Filters Mode
z
RAW and RAW+JPEG are not available. When RAW image quality is set,
images are captured with
73
image quality. When RAW+JPEG image quality
is set, images are captured with the specied JPEG image quality.
z
Continuous shooting is not available when [
I
], [
G
], [
X
], [
K
], [
H
], or [
c
] is
set.
z
With [
I
], the grainy preview will dier somewhat from the appearance of your
shots.
z
With [
G
] or [
c
] options, the soft focus preview may dier somewhat from the
appearance of your shots.
z
No histogram is displayed.
z
A magnied view is not available.
z
In advanced shooting modes, these settings are available from the Quick
Control screen: [
I
], [
G
], [
X
], [
J
], [
K
], [
H
], and [
c
].
z
Take some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the desired results.
100
Creative Filters Mode
Creative Filter Characteristics
z
I
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white eect.
z
G
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
z
X
Fish-eye eect
Gives the eect of a sh-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this lter eect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this lter eect magnies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the lter
eect while checking the resulting image. One AF point is used, xed at
the center.
z
K
Water painting eect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. By
adjusting the eect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
H
Toy camera eect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
101
Creative Filters Mode
z
c
Miniature eect
Creates a diorama eect.
Shooting under the default setting will keep the center looking sharp.
You can move the area that looks sharp (the scene frame) as described
in “Miniature Eect Operations” (
=
103). 1-point AF is used as the
AF method. Shooting with the AF point and scene frame aligned is
recommended.
z
A
HDR art standard
Photos retain more detail in highlights and shadows. With reduced
contrast and atter gradation, the nish resembles a painting. The
subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
z
B
HDR art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [HDR art standard], and the
low contrast and at gradation create a graphic art eect.
z
C
HDR art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the
picture looks like an oil painting.
z
D
HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to
make the picture look at. The picture looks faded and old. The subject
outlines will have intensely bright (or dark) edges.
z
With [
A
], [
B
], [
C
], and [
D
], you can shoot high dynamic range photos
that retain detail in highlights and shadows of high-contrast scenes. Three
consecutive images are captured at dierent brightnesses each time you shoot
and used to create a single image. See the cautions on
=
102.
102
Creative Filters Mode
[
A
], [
B
], [
C
], and [
D
] Notes
z
Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
z
Filter eect previews will not look exactly the same as your shots.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
z
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
z
Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots.
z
The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.
Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
z
Shooting under uorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
z
It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is nished.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
103
Creative Filters Mode
Miniature Eect Operations
1
Move the scene frame.
z
Use the scene frame to set an area that
will look sharp.
z
To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <
B
>
button or tap [
r
] in the lower right of the
screen.
z
To switch between vertical and
horizontal scene frame orientation, tap
[
T
] in the lower left of the screen.
z
To move a horizontal scene frame,
press the <
W
> <
X
> keys, and to move
a vertical scene frame, press the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys.
z
To return the scene frame to the center
of the screen, tap [
e
] in the lower left
of the screen.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm the position of
the scene frame. Next, set the AF point.
2
Move the AF point.
z
The AF point turns orange and can be
moved.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on.
z
Aligning the AF point and scene frame is
recommended.
z
To return the AF point to the center of
the screen, tap [
e
] in the lower left of
the screen.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm the position of
the AF point.
104
Creative Filters Mode
3
Take the picture.
z
You can switch the scene frame orientation in step 1 with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys when in horizontal orientation or the <
W
> <
X
> keys when in vertical
orientation.
106
Program AE Mode (P)
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the
subject’s brightness.
* “
d
” stands for Program.
* “AE” stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the shooting mode to [d].
2
Focus on the subject.
z
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
3
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the exposure value is not
blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
z
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates
underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use ash.
z
If the “1/4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates
overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND lter (sold separately) to
reduce the amount of light entering the lens.
107
Program AE Mode (P)
Dierences Between [
d
] and [
A
] Modes
z
In [
A
] mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode,
are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set are
limited. On the other hand, with [
d
] mode, only the shutter speed and aperture
are set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering mode, and
other functions.
Program Shift
z
To adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value while
maintaining the same exposure, press the shutter button halfway and turn the
<
6
> dial. This is called Program shift.
z
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns o).
z
Program shift cannot be used with ash.
108
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the
subject. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject.
A slower shutter speed can create a blurred eect, giving the impression of
motion.
* “
s
” stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1
Set the shooting mode to [s].
2
Set the desired shutter speed.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the aperture value is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
109
Shutter-priority AE Mode (Tv)
z
If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <
6
> dial to
set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a higher
ISO speed.
z
If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <
6
> dial to
set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a lower
ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
z
For example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
110
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject
brightness. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the
foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand,
a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* “
f
” stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1
Set the shooting mode to [f].
2
Set the desired aperture.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Check the display and shoot.
z
As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
111
Aperture-priority AE Mode (Av)
z
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <
6
>
dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking
stops or set a higher ISO speed.
z
If the “1/4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <
6
>
dial to set a smaller aperture (higher f/number) until the shutter speed blinking
stops or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
z
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/number
displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera,
“F00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Checking the Area in Focus
M
By assigning the movie shooting button to [1: Depth-of-eld preview] (using
[
z
Movie shooting button function] in [
5
: Custom Functions(C.Fn)]
(
=
462)), you can press the movie shooting button to stop down the lens
to the current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of eld).
z
The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground
to the background.
z
The resulting depth-of-eld is apparent as you change the aperture value while
holding down the depth-of-eld preview button.
z
Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to depth-
of-eld preview.
112
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.
To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a
commercially available exposure meter.
* “
a
” stands for Manual.
1
Set the shooting mode to [a].
2
Set the ISO speed (=140).
z
With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (
=
113).
3
Set the desired shutter speed.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
4
Set the aperture value.
z
Press the <
W
> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <
6
> dial to set a
value.
(
1
)(
2
)
5
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
z
Check the exposure level mark [
N
] to
see how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
(1) Standard exposure index
(2) Exposure level mark
113
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
6
Set the exposure and take the
picture.
z
Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture value.
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can
set exposure compensation (
=
139) as follows:
z
Touch the exposure level indicator
z
[
z
: Exposure comp.]
z
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may
not obtain the desired exposure eect. In this case, set the exposure
compensation.
z
With evaluative metering, holding down the shutter button halfway locks the
ISO speed once the subject is in focus with One-Shot AF.
z
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <
A
> button to lock the ISO speed.
z
To compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed the
<
A
> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <
A
> button,
recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.
114
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter
button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use
bulb exposures for night scenes, reworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1
Set the shooting mode to [a].
2
Set the shutter speed to [BULB].
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to the left to set
[BULB].
3
Set the aperture value.
z
Press the <
W
> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <
6
> dial to set a
value.
4
Take the picture.
z
The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button pressed
completely.
z
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the screen.
115
Manual Exposure Mode (M)
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
z
If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (
=
496).
z
With [
z
: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated
during long exposures (
=
164).
z
To reduce camera shake, consider using a tripod and optional Wireless Remote
Control BR-E1.
116
117117
Shooting Settings
This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on
the [
z
: Shooting settings] tab.
118118
Still Photo Shooting
z
A
M
icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available
only in advanced shooting modes ([
d
], [
s
], [
f
], or [
a
]).
124
Image Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality.
1
Select [z: Image quality].
2
Set the image quality.
z
To select the RAW quality, turn the
<
6
> dial, and to select the JPEG
quality, press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys.
z
Press <
0
> to set it.
z
Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting
screen always applies to a setting of [3:2], regardless of the actual aspect ratio
setting (
=
127).
z
If [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image,
73
will be set.
z
If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be
recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-
recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the
same le numbers (le extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
z
b
is in
7
(Fine) quality.
z
Meaning of image quality icons:
1
RAW,
F
Compact RAW, JPEG,
7
Fine,
8
Normal,
3
Large,
4
Medium,
6
Small.
125
Image Quality
RAW Images
RAW images are raw data from the image sensor that are recorded to the
card digitally as
1
or
F
(smaller than
1
) les, depending on your
selection.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW
images. You can make various adjustments to images depending upon how
they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of images reecting
the eects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
z
To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
z
Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer,
obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon website to update it
(
=
474). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or
earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.
z
Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images
taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software
manufacturer.
Guide to Image Quality Settings
For guidelines on le sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst
shots, see
=
497.
126
Image Quality
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The estimated maximum burst is shown on
the top of the shooting screen.
z
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98
or less. [BUSY] display indicates that internal memory is full and shooting
will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will
increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume
continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on
=
497.
127
Still Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the image’s aspect ratio.
1
Select [z: Still img aspect ratio].
2
Set the aspect ratio.
z
Select an aspect ratio, then press
<
0
>.
z
JPEG images
The images will be recorded with the set aspect ratio.
z
RAW images
The images will always be recorded in the [3:2] aspect ratio. The
selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image le. When
you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software), this allows you to generate an image with the same aspect
ratio set for shooting.
128
Still Image Aspect Ratio
Aspect Ratio
4:3 16:9 1:1
z
When you play back RAW images shot in the [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] aspect ratio,
they will be displayed with lines indicating the respective aspect ratio. (These
lines are not recorded in the image.)
129
Image Review Time
You can change how long images are displayed after shots. Set to [Hold]
to keep shots displayed immediately after you shoot, or set to [O] if you
prefer not to have shots displayed.
1
Select [z: Image review].
2
Set a time option.
z
When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [
5
: Power
saving].
130
M
Lens Aberration Correction
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical
characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using
[Lens aberration correction].
1
Select [z: Lens aberration
correction].
2
Select an item.
3
Select [Enable].
z
Conrm that the name of the attached
lens and (except for diraction
correction) [Correction data available]
are displayed.
z
If [Correction data not available]
or [
] is displayed, see “Digital Lens
Optimizer” (
=
132).
131
Lens Aberration Correction
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
z
Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene,
and Creative lters modes when correction data is registered on the camera.
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
z
To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the
area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
z
Setting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
z
When you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images
displayed.
z
Distortion correction is not applied in movie recording.
z
Playback of images with distortion correction applied may show the AF point
out of position, relative to the time of shooting.
132
Lens Aberration Correction
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along
with diraction and low-pass lter-induced loss of clarity.
If [Correction data not available] or [
] is displayed by [Digital Lens
Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the
camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the
eects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before
shooting.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is
not possible.)
z
Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diraction, although these options are not displayed.
z
Digital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene,
and Creative lters modes when correction data is registered on the camera.
133
Lens Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
z
[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
Diraction Correction
Diraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
z
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the
eects of correction.
z
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
z
For movie recording, [Diraction correction] will not appear.
z
With “Diraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass lter, etc.
is corrected in addition to diraction. Therefore, correction is eective even at
an aperture close to the open aperture.
z
[Diraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
134
Lens Aberration Correction
General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction
z
Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already
taken.
z
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
z
Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will
not be recorded.
z
The correction amount will be less (except for diraction correction) if the lens
used does not have distance information.
General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction
z
The eect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the eect may be dicult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
z
If the correction is dicult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
z
Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is
attached.
z
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the
result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for
diraction correction).
z
If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
135
Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive
mode suiting the scene or subject.
1
Select [z: Drive mode].
2
Set the drive mode.
z
[
u
] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be
taken.
z
[
i
] Continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at up to approx. 6.1 shots/sec. in One-Shot AF mode or 4.0
shots/sec. in Servo AF mode.
136
Drive Mode
z
[
m
/
Q
] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
z
[
l
] Self-timer: 2 sec.
z
[
q
] Self-timer: Continuous shooting
For self-timer shooting, see
=
137. For remote control shooting, see
=
193.
z
Conditions for maximum continuous shooting speed (
=
135) are as follows:
shooting with a fully charged battery at a 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed
and maximum aperture (which varies by lens) at room temperature (23°C/73°F).
z
The maximum continuous shooting speed may be slower depending on factors
such as the battery level, temperature, shutter speed, aperture value, subject
conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of ash, and shooting
settings.
z
With Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
depending on subject conditions or the lens used.
z
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous
shooting speed may drop o because shooting will be temporarily disabled
(
=
126).
137
Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
1
Select [z: Drive mode].
2
Select the self-timer.
z
m
(
Q
): Shoot in 10 sec.
l
: Shoot in 2 sec.
q
: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for
the specied number of shots*
* Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys to set the number
of continuous shots (2–10).
z
The [
Q
] icon is displayed when the
camera is paired with a wireless remote
control (sold separately,
=
193).
3
Take the picture.
z
Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
z
To check operation, look at the self-timer
lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the
countdown in seconds on the screen.
z
Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and
the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.
before the picture is taken.
138
Self-Timer
z
With [
q
], the shooting interval may become longer under some shooting
conditions, such as image quality, use of ash, and other factors.
z
[
I
] enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod.
This prevents camera shake if you shoot still-life or long exposures.
z
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (
=
258) to check focus
and exposure is recommended.
z
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (
=
78) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
z
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press <
0
>.
z
Auto power o time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
139
M
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the [
d
], [
s
], [
f
], and [
a
]
shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation when [
a
] mode and ISO Auto are
both set, see
=
113.
1
Select the exposure level indicator.
z
Press the <
W
> key and select the
exposure level indicator.
Increased exposure
for a brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
2
Set the compensation amount.
z
Watch the screen and set by turning the
<
6
> dial.
z
A [
O
] icon is displayed to indicate
exposure compensation.
3
Take the picture.
z
To cancel exposure compensation, set
the exposure level indicator [
N
] to the
standard exposure index ([
C
]).
z
If [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (
=
143) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
z
The exposure compensation amount will remain in eect even after you turn o
the camera.
z
You can also set with [
z
: Exposure comp.].
140
M
ISO Speed Settings
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient
light level. ISO speed is set automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene, and
Creative lters modes.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie recording, see
=
501.
ISO Speed
1
Tap the ISO speed icon.
2
Set the ISO speed.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set the
ISO speed.
z
ISO speed can be set within ISO
100–25600 in 1/3-stop increments.
z
Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically.
141
ISO Speed Settings
ISO Speed Guide
z
Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of
camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of
eld), in some shooting conditions.
z
High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper
depth of eld), and longer ash range but may increase image noise.
z
Can also be set in [ISO speed] in [
z
ISO speed settings].
z
Under [
5
: Custom Functions(C.Fn)], if [ISO expansion] is set to [1:On], “H”
(equivalent to ISO 51200) can also be selected (
=
461).
z
Image noise (such as dots of light or banding) may increase and apparent
resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 51200), because this is an
expanded ISO speed.
z
If [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (
=
144),
ISO 100/125/160 and H (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be selected.
z
When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, or long exposure,
image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or color
shift may become noticeable.
z
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as
a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images
may not be recorded properly.
z
If you use a high ISO speed and ash to shoot a close subject, overexposure
may result.
142
ISO Speed Settings
Max for Auto
The maximum ISO speed for the ISO Auto range can be set between ISO
400 and ISO 25600.
1
Select [zISO speed settings].
2
Select [Max for Auto].
3
Set the maximum ISO speed.
z
Select the ISO speed, then press
<
0
>.
143
M
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or
contrast is too low or high.
1
Select [z: Auto Lighting
Optimizer].
2
Set a correction option.
z
Noise may increase and clarity may change, under some shooting conditions.
z
If the eect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
z
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or
ash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come
out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
z
Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes
longer.
z
In step 2, if you press the <
B
> button and remove the checkmark [
X
] for
[Disable during man expo] setting, [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also
be set even in [
a
] mode.
144
M
Highlight Tone Priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1
Select [z: Highlight tone priority].
2
Set an option.
z
[Enable]: Improves gradation in
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes smoother.
z
[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed
highlights even more than [Enable],
under some shooting conditions.
z
Noise may increase slightly.
z
The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be
set.
z
[Enhanced] is not available when recording movies.
z
With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
145
M
Metering Mode
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
Evaluative metering is set automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene, and
Creative lters modes (except [
X
]).
1
Select [z: Metering mode].
2
Set the metering mode.
z
[
q
] Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The
camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.
z
[
w
] Partial metering
Eective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due
to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 5.8% of the area at the center of the
screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.
z
[
r
] Spot metering
Eective when metering a specic part of the subject or scene. Covers
approx. 2.9% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot metering
area is indicated on the screen.
z
[
e
] Center-weighted average metering
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the
screen weighted more heavily.
146
Metering Mode
z
By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With [
q
], holding
down the shutter button halfway will lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after
focus is achieved with One-Shot AF. In the [
w
], [
r
], and [
e
] modes, the
exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button
halfway does not lock the exposure.)
147
M
Metering Timer
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the
duration of exposure display) after it is triggered by an action such as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [z: Metering timer].
2
Set a time option.
148
M
Exposure Simulation
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure)
of the actual image will look.
1
Select [z: Expo. simulation].
2
Set an option.
z
Enable (
g
)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the
image brightness will change accordingly.
z
Disable (
E
)
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Even
if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard
brightness.
149
M
White Balance
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the
Auto [
Q
] (Ambience priority) or [
Q
w] (White priority) setting will obtain
the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with
Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it
manually by shooting a white object.
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Select an item.
(Approx.)
Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Q
Auto (Ambience priority,
=
151)
3000–7000
Q
w Auto (White priority,
=
151)
W
Daylight 5200
E
Shade 7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset 6000
Y
Tungsten light 3200
U
White uorescent light 4000
D
Flash Automatically set*
O
Custom (
=
152) 2000–10000
P
Color temperature (
=
153) 2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be xed to approx. 6000K.
150
White Balance
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided
depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color
is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. With this
function, you can take the pictures with natural color tones.
151
White Balance
[
Q
] Auto White Balance
With [
Q
], you can slightly increase the intensity of the image’s warm color
cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [
Q
w], you can
reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color cast.
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Select [Q].
z
With [
Q
] selected, press the <
B
>
button.
3
Select an item.
Cautions for Setting [
Q
w]
z
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
z
When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
z
When using ash, the color tone will be the same as with [
Q
].
152
White Balance
[
O
] Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specic light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this
procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
1
Shoot a white object.
z
Aim the camera at a plain white object,
so that white lls the screen.
z
Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
z
You can use any of the white balance
settings.
2
Select [z: Custom White Balance].
3
Import the white balance data.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<
0
>.
Select [OK] to import the data.
4
Select [z: White balance].
5
Select the custom white balance.
z
Select [
O
].
153
White Balance
z
If the exposure obtained in step 1 diers greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
z
These images cannot be selected: Images captured with Picture Style set to
[Monochrome], images with a Creative lter applied before or after shooting,
cropped images, or images shot with another camera.
z
Images that cannot be used in the setting may be displayed.
z
Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard
18% gray reector (commercially-available).
[
P
] Color Temperature
1
Select [z: White balance].
2
Set the color temperature.
z
Select [
P
].
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set the desired
color temperature, then press <
0
>.
z
The color temperature can be set from
approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K
increments.
z
When setting the color temperature for an articial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
z
If you set [
P
] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the
dierence between the color temperature meter’s reading and the camera’s
color temperature reading.
154
M
White Balance Correction
White balance correction has the same eect as using a commercially
available color temperature conversion lter or color compensating lter.
1
Select [z: WB correction].
Sample setting: A2, G1
2
Set the white balance correction.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
[
■
] mark to your preferred position.
z
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward the
color in the direction of the move.
On the right of the screen, [Shift]
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
z
To clear all [WB correction] settings,
tap [Clear all].
z
Press <
0
> to exit the setting.
z
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature
conversion lter.)
155
M
Color Space
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. For normal
shooting, sRGB is recommended.
1
Select [z: Color space].
2
Set a color space option.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial
uses. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-
compatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
z
If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the rst character in the
le name will be an underscore “_”.
z
The ICC prole is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC prole,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
z
[sRGB] is set automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene, and Creative lters
modes.
156
M
Picture Style Selection
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
eectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select a Picture Style.
Picture Style Characteristics
z
[
D
] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors
will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature,
outdoor and sunset scenes.
z
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
z
[
P
] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
z
[
Q
] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (
=
160), you can adjust the skin tone.
157
Picture Style Selection
z
[
R
] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Eective
for impressive landscapes.
z
[
u
] Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and ne texture description of the subject. The
colors will be slightly vivid.
z
[
S
] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
z
[
U
] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject
that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be
adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images
with modest brightness and color saturation.
z
[
V
] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
z
Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
z
[
W
] User Dened 1–3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture
Style le, etc. and adjust it as desired (
=
162). With any of the User
Dened Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will be taken with
the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Auto].
158
Picture Style Selection
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings. The
numbers indicate the values for these settings specied for the respective
Picture Style.
g
Sharpness
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter eect (Monochrome)
l
Toning eect (Monochrome)
z
During movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]
and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
159
M
Picture Style Customization
You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings.
To customize [Monochrome], see
=
161.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select a Picture Style.
z
Select the Picture Style to adjust, then
tap [Detail set.].
3
Select a setting item.
z
See “Settings and Eects” (
=
160) for
details on the settings and eects.
4
Set the eect level.
z
Set a value, then press <
0
>.
z
Press the <
M
> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
z
Any settings you change from default
values are displayed in blue.
160
Picture Style Customization
Settings and Eects
g
Sharpness
A
Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
B
Fineness*
1
1: Fine 5: Grainy
C
Threshold*
2
1: Low 5: High
h
Contrast –4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
i
Saturation –4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
j
Color tone –4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the neness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,
the ner the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the dierence in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more
the outline will be emphasized when the contrast dierence is low. However, noise
tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
z
For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be
set (not displayed).
z
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter settings of
the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
z
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, rst select the adjusted Picture
Style, then shoot.
161
Picture Style Customization
[
V
] Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the eects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or
[Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set
[Filter eect] and [Toning eect].
[
k
] Filter eect
With a lter eect applied to a monochrome
image, you can make white clouds or green
trees stand out more.
Filter Sample Eects
N:
None
Normal black-and-white image with no lter eects.
Ye:
Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or:
Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R:
Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G:
Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
z
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the lter eect more pronounced.
[
l
] Toning eect
By applying a toning eect, you can create
a monochrome image in the selected color.
Eective when you want to create more
impressive images.
162
M
Picture Style Registration
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or
[User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with dierent
settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS
software) can also be modied here.
1
Select [z: Picture Style].
2
Select [User Def.].
z
Select [User Def. *], then tap [Detail
set.].
3
Press <0>.
z
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<
0
>.
4
Select the base Picture Style.
z
Select the base Picture Style.
z
Also select styles this way when
adjusting styles registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software).
163
Picture Style Registration
5
Select an item.
6
Set the eect level.
z
For details, see “Picture Style
Customization” (
=
159).
z
Press the <
M
> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
The base Picture Style will be indicated
on the right of [User Def. *].
Blue style names indicate that you
have changed the settings from default
values.
z
If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Dened Picture Style.
z
Selecting [Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera] (
=
455) will restore all [User
Def. *] settings to defaults.
z
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
z
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style le to the camera, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
164
M
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding)
typical of long exposures can be reduced.
1
Select [z: Long exp. noise
reduction].
2
Set a reduction option.
z
[AUTO] Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]
setting is eective enough in most cases.
z
[ON] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The
[Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the
[Auto] setting.
z
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
z
Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or
[Auto] setting.
z
[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not
displayed until processing is nished, when you can shoot again.
165
M
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is
especially eective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at
low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas)
can further be reduced.
1
Select [z: High ISO speed NR].
2
Set the level.
z
[
M
] Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High]. For a
single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged
automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [Multi
Shot Noise Reduction].
166
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
z
If there is signicant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise
reduction eect may become smaller.
z
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
Using a tripod is recommended.
z
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
z
Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or at, single-tone images.
z
If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
z
After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is displayed as
images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is nished.
z
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting
RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with features such as long exposure noise
reduction or Creative lters.
z
Flash photography is not possible.
z
[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
z
The camera automatically switches to [Standard] if you turn it o, replace the
battery or card, switch to [
A
], [
D
], Special scene, or Creative lters mode,
or switch to movie recording.
167
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically.
1
Enable the Touch Shutter.
z
Tap [
y
] on the screen’s bottom right.
z
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [
y
] and [
x
].
z
[
x
] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
z
[
y
] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
2
Tap on the screen to shoot.
z
Tap on the face or subject on the screen.
z
On the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (
=
172).
z
When [
x
] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then the
picture is taken automatically.
z
If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot be
taken. Tap on the face or subject on the
screen again.
168
Touch Shutter
z
Even if you set the drive mode to [
i
], the camera will still shoot in the single
shooting mode.
z
Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on
the image with [One-Shot AF].
z
Tapping on the screen in magnied view will not focus or take the picture.
z
If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [
z
: Image review] set to [Hold],
you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
z
To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The rst tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb exposure.
Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.
169
M
AF Operation
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1
Select [z: AF operation].
2
Select a setting item.
z
If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the
picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that
Make Focusing Dicult” (
=
181).
170
AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)
This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter
button halfway, the camera will focus only once.
z
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
z
The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button
halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
z
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see
=
135.
z
If [
5
: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down
the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject
continuously.
z
When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
z
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
z
For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see
=
135.
z
Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s
speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
z
Zooming during continuous shooting may throw o the focus. Zoom rst, then
recompose and shoot.
z
The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
171
AF Operation
AF-Assist Beam
The AF-assist beam (
=
36) may re when you press the shutter button
halfway under low light or in similar conditions, to make autofocusing easier.
z
The AF-assist beam does not re when [
z
: AF operation] is set to [Servo
AF].
z
The AF-assist beam does not re when Touch AF is used (when [
z
: Touch
Shutter] is set to [Disable]).
172
AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. The
camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone AF
frame. In [
A
], [
D
] or [
J
] mode, [
u
+Tracking] is set automatically.
For instructions on selecting an AF method, see
=
174.
: Face+Tracking
The camera detects and focuses on
people’s faces. [
p
] (an AF point) appears
over any face detected, which is then
tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
With Servo AF, focusing continues as long as subjects can be tracked within
the Area AF frame as you shoot.
: Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area
than 1-point AF.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF
point [
S
].
173
AF Method
: Zone AF
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames
to cover a large area, which makes
focusing easier than with 1-point AF.
Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone
AF frame are also given priority in focusing.
AF points in focus are displayed with [
S
].
174
AF Method
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see
=
187.
1
Select [z: AF method].
2
Select a setting item.
z
The descriptions on
=
175–
=
177 assume that the AF operation is set to
[One-Shot AF] (
=
170). With [Servo AF] (
=
170) set, the AF point will turn
blue when focus is achieved.
z
Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation), see
=
167.
175
AF Method
z
u
(face)+Tracking:
c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point [
p
] also moves to track the face.
1
Check the AF point.
z
[
p
] (an AF point) appears over any face
detected.
2
Focus on the subject.
z
Once you press the shutter button
halfway and the subject is in focus, the
AF point turns green and the camera
beeps.
z
An orange AF point indicates that the
camera could not focus on subjects.
3
Take the picture.
176
AF Method
Tapping a Face for Focus
Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to [
] and
focuses where you tap.
Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point [ ] moves to
track it.
z
If the subject’s face is signicantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (
=
187) so that the face can be detected,
then perform AF.
z
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
z
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too
bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
z
AF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the
center.
z
The [
p
] may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
z
The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
177
AF Method
z
Spot AF/1-point AF/Zone AF
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF
screens are used as an example.
(
1
)
1
Check the AF point.
z
The AF point (1) will appear.
With Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is
displayed.
2
Move the AF point.
z
To move the AF point, tap where you
want to focus.
z
To return the AF point or Zone AF frame
to the center of the screen, tap [
e
].
z
For magnied display, tap [
u
]. Each
tap of [
u
] changes the magnication
ratio.
3
Focus on the subject.
z
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point will
turn orange.
4
Take the picture.
178
AF Method
z
The camera will keep moving the active AF point [
S
] to track subjects for Zone
AF when Servo AF operation is used, but under some shooting conditions (such
as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
z
Focusing with an AF-assist beam may be dicult with AF points near the edge
of the screen. In this case, move to an AF point in the center of the screen.
179
AF Method
Magnied View
You can check the focus by tapping [
u
] to magnify display by approx. 5×
or 10×. Magnied view is not possible with [
u
+Tracking].
z
Magnication is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF] or [1-point AF]
and on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF].
z
Autofocusing is performed with magnied display if you press the shutter
button halfway when set to [Spot AF] and [1-point AF]. When set to
[Zone AF], autofocusing is performed after restoring normal display.
z
With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnied
view, the camera will return to the normal view for focusing.
z
If focusing is dicult in the magnied view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
z
If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnied view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
z
AF speed diers between the normal view and magnied view.
z
Continuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is
magnied.
z
With the magnied view, achieving focus becomes more dicult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
180
AF Method
AF Shooting Tips
z
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will
focus again.
z
Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
z
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to
focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
z
If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may icker, and
focusing may be dicult. In this case, restart the camera and resume
shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
z
If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (
=
187).
z
For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try
centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into
focus, then recompose the shot before shooting.
z
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
181
AF Method
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult
z
Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color at surfaces or
when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
z
Subjects in low light.
z
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal
direction.
z
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
z
Fine lines and subject outlines.
z
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
z
Night scenes or points of light.
z
The image ickers under uorescent or LED lighting.
z
Extremely small subjects.
z
Subjects at the edge of the screen.
z
Strongly backlit or reective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reective body, etc.).
z
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a
cage, etc.).
z
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to
camera shake or subject blur.
z
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
z
Soft focus eect is applied with a soft focus lens.
z
A special eect lter is used.
z
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and
settings such as aspect ratio, movie recording quality, and Movie digital IS.
182
Eye Detection AF
With the AF method set to [
u
+Tracking], the camera can focus on people’s
eyes.
1
Select [z: Eye Detection AF].
2
Select [Enable].
3
Aim the camera at the subject.
z
An AF point is displayed around their
eye.
z
You can tap the screen to select an eye
for focus.
z
The entire face is selected when you tap
other facial features, such as their nose
or mouth. Eyes to focus on are selected
automatically.
4
Take the picture.
z
Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and
shooting conditions.
z
[Eye Detection AF] can be set by pressing the <
M
> button when you have
set [AF method] to [
u
+Tracking] on the Quick Control screen after pressing
<
0
>.
183
Continuous AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to
focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [z: Continuous AF].
2
Select [Enable].
z
Enabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the lens
is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
184
Focus Mode
You can specify the method of focusing (focus mode) when using EF-M
lenses.
1
Select [z: Focus mode].
2
Select a setting item.
z
[AF]: Autofocus
z
[MF]: Manual focus
185
M
Manually Focusing with a Lens after AF
For EF-M, EF, or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing,
you can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.
1
Select [z: Lens electronic MF].
2
Select an item.
z
[
] Disable after One-Shot AF
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
z
[ ] Enable after One-Shot AF
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep
holding down the shutter button halfway.
z
For details on your lens’s manual focus specications, refer to the lens
instruction manual.
186
AF-Assist Beam Firing
You can enable ring of the camera’s AF-assist beam.
1
Select [z: AF-assist beam ring].
2
Select an item.
z
[ON] Enable
Enables ring of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
z
[OFF] Disable
Disables ring of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to re the AF-
assist beam.
187
Manual Focus
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and
focus manually.
1
Set [z: Focus mode] to [MF].
z
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
(
1
) (
2
) (
3
)
2
Magnify the image.
z
Each tap of [
u
] changes the screen, as
follows.
1× → 5× → 10×
(1) AE lock
(2) Magnied area position
(3) Magnication (approx.)
3
Determine an area to magnify.
z
You can move the magnied area by
scrolling with your nger after you tap.
z
To center the magnied area, tap [
e
].
188
Manual Focus
4
Focus manually.
z
While looking at the magnied image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
z
After achieving focus, tap [
u
] to return
to the normal view.
5
Take the picture.
z
When using non EF-M lenses, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> in
step 1.
z
Even with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.
189
Setting MF Peaking
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color as you focus manually
to make it easier to focus. You can set the outline color and adjust the
sensitivity (level) of edge detection.
1
Select [z: MF peaking settings].
2
Select [Peaking].
z
Select [On].
3
Set the level and color.
z
Set it as necessary.
z
Peaking display is not shown during magnied display.
z
MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when
expanded ISO speed is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking]
to [O].
z
Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
190
Image Stabilization
You can adjust the Image Stabilizer (IS) setting when using IS-equipped
EF-M lenses. For details on [
k
Digital IS], see
=
235.
1
Select [z: IS settings].
2
Select [IS mode].
3
Set an option.
z
[O]
Deactivates image stabilization.
z
[On]
Camera shake will be corrected.
z
[IS mode] is not displayed for IS-equipped EF or EF-S lenses.
z
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to hold it still. Additionally, you should set [IS
mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera.
191
M
Exposure Lock (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure
separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <
A
> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the picture. It is eective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
z
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
Press the <A> button.
z
A [
A
] icon is displayed in the lower left
of the screen to indicate that exposure is
locked (AE lock).
z
To cancel AE Lock, press the <
A
>
button again.
3
Recompose and take the picture.
AE Lock Eects
Metering
Mode
AF Point Selection Method
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
q
Exposure centered on the AF point
in focus is locked.
Exposure centered on the selected
AF point is locked.
wre
Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
* When set to [
q
] with [
z
: Focus mode] set to [MF], exposure at the center of the
screen is locked.
z
AE lock is not available in bulb exposure.
192
Type of Digest Movie
Both still photos and clips are captured when you shoot in [
D
] mode, but
you can specify whether to include the still photos in the resulting digest
movie.
1
Set the shooting mode to [D].
2
Select [z: Digest type].
3
Set an option.
z
[Include stills]
Digest movies include still photos.
z
[No stills]
Digest movies do not include still photos.
193
Remote Control Shooting
You can shoot remotely by using an optional Wireless Remote Control BR-
E1, which pairs via Bluetooth.
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the
camera.
After pairing the camera and BR-E1 (
=
389), set the drive mode to [
Q
]
(
=
136).
For operation procedures, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
z
Auto power o time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control
shooting.
z
The remote control can also be used for movie recording (
=
237).
194
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
Image Quality
z
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding)
may become noticeable.
z
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the
image.
z
Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal
temperature to rise and aect image quality. When you are not shooting, always
turn o the camera.
z
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high,
image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before
shooting again.
White [
s
] and Red [
E
] Internal Temperature Warning Icons
z
If the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot
environments, a white [
s
] or red [
E
] icon will appear.
z
The white [
s
] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline.
Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
z
The red [
E
] icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically. Shooting
will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop
shooting temporarily or turn o the camera and let it cool down a while.
z
Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [
s
]
or red [
E
] icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn o
the camera.
z
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a
high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [
s
] icon
is displayed.
Shooting Results
z
In magnied view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in
orange. If you take the picture in magnied view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
z
Even if you take the picture in magnied view, the image will be captured with
the image area of the normal view.
195
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Images and Display
z
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reect the
brightness of the captured image.
z
Under low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO
speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality varies
between display and captured images.
z
The screen or exposure value may icker if the light source (lighting) changes.
In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you
will use.
z
Pointing the camera at dierent direction may momentarily prevent correct
display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
z
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show
the bright area.
z
In low light, if you set the [
5
: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise or
irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular colors
will not be recorded in the captured image.
z
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced
than in the actual image.
Lens
z
Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an IS-equipped EF-M lens with [IS mode] in [
z
: IS
settings] set to [On]. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may
decrease the number of possible shots depending on the shooting conditions.
Setting [IS mode] to [O] is recommended when you are using a tripod or
other means to secure the camera.
z
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
z
With an optional HDMI cable (camera end: Type D), you can display images on
a television (
=
272). Note that no sound will be output.
196
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see
=
503.
z
When [
g
] is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at the
brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.
z
If [
g
] is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that
diers from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reect the exposure setting. Note that
the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
z
Exposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings. The
[
g
] icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed
on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
z
The histogram can be displayed when [
z
: Expo. simulation] is set to [Enable]
(
=
148).
197197
Movie Recording
For movie recording, set the shooting mode switch
to <
k
>.
z
You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo
shooting.
z
You can specify movie recording mode in [
z
: Shooting mode] after setting
the shooting mode switch to <
k
>.
200
Movie Mode
[
k
] Autoexposure Recording
Autoexposure control will take eect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1
Set the shooting mode switch to
<k>.
2
Tap the shooting mode icon.
3
Set the shooting mode to [k].
z
Select [
k
] (Movie auto exposure), then
press <
0
>.
4
Focus on the subject.
z
Before recording a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (
=
174–
=
181,
=
187).
z
By default, [
z
: Movie Servo AF] is set
to [Enable] so that the camera always
keeps focusing (
=
233).
z
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with the
current AF method.
201
Movie Mode
(
2
)
(1)
5
Record the movie.
z
Press the movie shooting button to start
recording a movie.
z
While the movie is being recorded, the
[
o
REC] mark (1) will be displayed on
the upper right of the screen.
z
Sound is recorded by the microphones
at the positions indicated (2).
z
To stop recording the movie, press the
movie shooting button again.
z
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <
A
> button. To cancel,
press the <
A
> button again. (Retained until the <
A
> button is pressed again.)
z
Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops.
z
ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded in movie Exif
information.
ISO Speed in [
k
] Mode
ISO speed is set automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see
=
501.
202
Movie Mode
[
M
] Manual Exposure Recording
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie
recording.
1
Set the shooting mode switch to
<k>.
2
Set the shooting mode to [M].
z
Select [
M
] (Movie manual exposure),
then press <
0
>.
3
Set the ISO speed (=204).
z
Tap the ISO speed icon.
z
With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (
=
113).
(1)
4
Set the desired shutter speed.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to set it.
z
Shutter speed can be set in a range of
1/4000–1/8 sec.
(2)
5
Set the aperture value.
z
Press the <
W
> key to select the aperture
value, then turn the <
6
> dial to set a
value.
203
Movie Mode
6
Focus and record the movie.
z
The procedure is the same as steps
4 and 5 for “[
k
] Autoexposure
Recording” (
=
200).
z
Double-check camera settings before recording movies if you change the
shooting mode switch from <
A
> or <
z
> to <
k
>.
z
During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing
so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO
speeds.
z
When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25
sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
z
If you change the shutter speed while recording under uorescent or LED
lighting, image icker may be recorded.
z
With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
z
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <
A
> button to lock the ISO speed.
To cancel, press the <
A
> button again. (Retained until the <
A
> button is
pressed again.)
z
If you press the <
A
> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level dierence on the exposure level indicator compared to when the
<
A
> button was pressed.
z
With the camera ready to shoot in the [
M
] mode, you can display the
histogram by pressing the <
B
> button.
204
Movie Mode
ISO Speed for [Movie manual exp.]
You can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically.
For details on the ISO speed, see
=
501.
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken in movie modes. To shoot still photos, set
the shooting mode switch to <
A
> or <
z
>.
Information Display (Movie Recording)
For details on the icons displayed for movie recording, see
=
505.
205
Movie Mode
Cautions for Movie Recording
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
If you shoot something that has ne detail, moire or false colors may result.
z
If [
Q
] or [
Q
w] is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
recording, the white balance may also change.
z
If you record a movie under uorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
icker.
z
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise
may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic
focusing ring.
z
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus.
z
Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
z
During movie recording, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown o, changes in movie brightness is
recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical sound of
the lens is recorded.
z
Avoid covering the built-in microphones (
=
201) with your ngers or other
objects.
z
The date/time/zone must be set to enable normal camera temperature control.
Once the date/time/zone are set, temperature warnings can be displayed
correctly.
z
If [Overheated! Shutting down.] is displayed, turn o the camera and wait
at least 3 min. Note that the camera should be o for 9 min. or more if you
will record a 4K movie up to 9 min. 59 sec. or a high frame rate movie up to 7
min. 29 sec. (Actual movie recording times may be shorter, depending on the
recording environment and conditions of use.)
z
“General Movie Recording Cautions” are on
=
242–
=
243.
z
If necessary, also read “General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” on
=
194–
=
195.
206
Movie Mode
Notes for Movie Recording
z
Each time you record a movie, a new movie le is created on the card.
z
The movie’s eld of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies is
approx. 100%.
z
To enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [
5
: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Start/stop mov rec].
z
Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (
=
201).
z
With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
z
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.
207
Movie Recording Quality
On the [
z
: Movie rec quality] tab, select
[Movie rec. size] to set the image size,
frame rate, and compression method. The
movie will be recorded as an MP4 le.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [
5
: Video system]
setting (
=
445).
z
The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording
size. Before recording movies, see
=
499 to check the performance
requirements of the card.
Image Size
z
[
H
] 3840×2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. Not
available unless the shooting mode switch is set to <
k
>.
z
[
L
] 1920×1080
The movie is recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9.
z
[
w
] 1280×720
The movie is recorded in High-Denition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
z
If you change the [
5
: Video system] setting, also set [
z
: Movie rec. size]
again.
z
Normal playback of 4K and
L8
/
7
movies may not be possible on other
devices, because playback is processing-intensive.
z
Clarity and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording size, the lens
used, and other settings.
z
Movies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.
208
Movie Recording Quality
4K Movie Recording
z
Recording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details, see
“Cards that Can Record Movies” (
=
499).
z
The maximum recording time per 4K movie is 9 min. 59 sec. (
=
213).
z
Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may
cause the camera’s internal temperature to increase faster or become
higher than for regular movies. If [
] or a red [
E
] icon appears
during movie recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the
movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do
not remove the card immediately.)
z
From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx. 8.3
megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (
=
268).
z
Contrast detection is used to focus when recording 4K movies. Focusing may
take longer and be more dicult than when recording HD or Full HD movies.
209
Movie Recording Quality
Frame Rate (fps: frame per second)
z
[
2
] 119.88fps/[
8
] 59.94fps/[
6
] 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico, etc.).
z
[
3
] 100.00fps/[
7
] 50.00fps/[
5
] 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia,
etc.).
z
[
4
] 23.98fps
Mainly for motion pictures.
4
(23.98 fps) is available when [
5
: Video
system] is set to [For NTSC].
Compression Method
z
[
X
] IPB (Standard)
Uses IPB compression for normal movie recording. Compresses multiple
frames at a time eciently for recording.
z
[
W
] ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Uses ALL-I compression for time-lapse movie recording (
=
217).
Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although le sizes
are larger than with IPB (Standard), movies are more suitable for editing.
Movie Recording Format
z
[
C
] MP4
All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie les in MP4
format (le extension “.MP4”).
210
Movie Recording Quality
Cards that Can Record Movies
For details on cards you can use for various movie recording sizes, see
=
499.
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing and reading
speed (as specied in card performance requirements) shown in the
table on
=
499 or higher than the standard specication. Test cards by
recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specied size (
=
207).
z
Format cards before recording 4K movies (
=
435).
z
If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
z
When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
suciently higher than the bit rate.
z
When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again.
If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
z
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera
before recording movies is recommended (
=
435).
z
To check the card’s writing and reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website, etc.
211
Movie Recording Quality
High Frame Rate
You can record HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.88 fps or 100.00 fps
by setting [High Frame Rate] under [
z
: Movie rec quality] to [Enable].
This is ideal for recording movies that will be played back in slow motion.
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec.
Movies are recorded as
w
2
X
or
w
3
X
.
Movie Servo AF and Movie digital IS have
no eect when recording High Frame Rate
movies. AF is not used to focus.
Because High Frame Rate movies are recorded as 29.97 fps/25.00 fps
movie les, they are played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
z
Check the [Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable].
z
The screen may icker if you record High Frame Rate movies under uorescent
or LED lighting.
z
For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the
movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
z
Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies
do not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded.
z
Sound is not recorded.
212
Movie Recording Quality
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without
interruption.
z
Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will
format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the le size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie le will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie
le individually. Movie les cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
and play it back.
z
Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it
in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the le size exceeds 4 GB
during movie recording, the movie will be saved as a single le (rather
than being split into multiple les).
z
When importing movie les exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS
Utility or a card reader (
=
477). It may not be possible to save movie les
exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer’s
operating system.
213
Movie Recording Quality
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
For details on le sizes and the recording time available at each movie
recording size, see
=
500.
Movie Recording Time Limit
z
When recording 4K movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 9 min. 59 sec. Once 9 min. 59
sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new le).
z
When recording Full HD/HD movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min.
59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new le).
z
When recording High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Once 7 min. 29
sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a High Frame Rate movie again by pressing the movie shooting button
(which records the movie as a new le).
214
Movie Self-Timer
Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.
1
Select z [Movie self-timer].
2
Select an item.
3
Record the movie.
z
After you tap [
o
] or press the movie
shooting button, the camera beeps and
displays number of seconds left before
recording.
215
Sound Recording
You can record movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo microphone.
You can also freely adjust the sound-
recording level.
Use [
z
: Sound recording] to set sound
recording functions.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
z
Auto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control
will take eect automatically in response to the sound level.
z
Manual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Select [Rec. level]
and press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys while looking at the level meter to adjust
the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so
that the level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the [12] (–12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds [0], the sound will be distorted.
z
Disable
Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter
Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind
outdoors. When the wind lter function takes eect, part of the low bass
sounds will also be reduced.
216
Sound Recording
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if
[Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion
may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable]
is recommended.
z
If you use the Wi-Fi (wireless communication) function with a microphone, the
sound noise may be recorded. During sound recording, using the wireless
communication function is not recommended.
z
The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound and
mechanical sound of the camera during shooting.
z
[Sound rec.] changes to [Sound recording]: [On]/[O] in [
A
], [
D
], Special
scene, and Creative lters modes. Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the
recording level.
z
Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI,
except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
z
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.
z
Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
217
Time-lapse Movies
Images shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create
a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It is
eective for a xed-point observation of changing scenery, growing plants,
celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following
quality:
H
6W
(NTSC)/
H
5W
(PAL) for 4K shooting, and
L6W
(NTSC)/
L5W
(PAL) for Full HD shooting.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the [
5
:
Video system] setting (
=
445).
1
Select a shooting mode.
z
Select [
k
] (
=
200)
or
[
M
]
(
=
202).
2
Select [z: Time-lapse movie].
3
Select [Time-lapse].
4
Select a scene.
z
Select a scene to suit the shooting
situation.
z
For greater freedom when setting the
shooting interval and number of shots
manually, select [Custom].
218
Time-lapse Movies
5
Set the shooting interval.
z
Select [Interval/shots].
z
Select [Interval] (sec.). Use the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to set a value.
(2)(1)
z
Refer to [
k
: Time required] (1) and
[
3
: Playback time] (2) to set the
number.
When [Custom] is set
z
Select [Interval] (min.:sec.).
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
6
Set the number of shots.
z
Select [No. of shots]. Use the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys to set a value, then press
<
0
>.
z
Refer to the [
k
: Time required] and
[
3
: Playback time] to set the number.
When [Custom] is set
z
Select the digit.
z
Press <
0
> to display [
r
].
z
Set the desired number, then press
<
0
>. (Returns to [
s
].)
z
Check that [
3
: Playback time] is not
displayed in orange.
z
Select [OK] to register the setting.
z
With [Scene**], available intervals and numbers of shots are restricted, to suit
the type of scene.
z
If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2
min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
219
Time-lapse Movies
7
Select the desired movie recording
size.
z
H
(3840×2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame
rate is 29.97 fps (
6
) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (
5
) for PAL, and
movies are recorded in MP4 (
C
) format with ALL-I (
W
) compression.
z
L
(1920×1080)
The movie is recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (
6
) for NTSC and
25.00 fps (
5
) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (
C
) format
with ALL-I (
W
) compression.
z
The
H
6
H
5
bit rate is approx. 300 Mbps, and the
L6L5
bit
rate, approx. 90 Mbps. Use a card with a suciently fast read speed.
220
Time-lapse Movies
8
Congure [Auto exposure].
z
Fixed 1st frame
When taking the rst shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the rst
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings
for the rst shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
z
Each frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions such as
Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be set
automatically for each subsequent shot.
9
Congure [Screen auto o].
z
Disable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed.
Note that the screen will turn o when approx. 30 min. elapse after the
recording started.
z
Enable
Note that the screen will turn o when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the
shooting started.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the <
B
> button to turn
on/o the screen.
221
Time-lapse Movies
10
Set the beeper.
z
Select [Beep as img taken].
z
If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
(2)(1)
11
Check the settings.
(1) Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
(2) Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD
movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
222
Time-lapse Movies
12
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to turn o the
menu screen.
(
1
)
13
Record the time-lapse movie.
z
Press the shutter button halfway to
check the focus and exposure.
z
Press the <
o
> button to start time-
lapse movie recording.
z
The number of shots remaining is
displayed (1).
z
While the time-lapse movie is recorded,
[
o
REC] is displayed.
z
AF will not work during time-lapse movie
recording.
z
Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the shutter make no
mechanical sound during time-lapse
movie recording.
z
When the set number of shots are taken,
the time-lapse movie recording ends.
z
To cancel recording time-lapse movies,
set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
223
Time-lapse Movies
z
If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of shots,
[Playback time] will be displayed in orange. Although the camera can continue
shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
z
If the movie le size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and the
card is not formatted in exFAT (
=
436), [Playback time] will be displayed in
orange. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie le size reaches 4
GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.
z
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
z
Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a
computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.
z
Movie Servo AF will not function.
z
Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens
may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens
aberration correction not to function properly.
z
When recording a time-lapse movie under a ickering light, noticeable image
ickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
z
Images that are displayed while time-lapse movies are being recorded may
look dierent from the resulting movie. (For example, there may be inconsistent
brightness from ickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO speed.)
z
When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during
shooting may look dierent from what is actually recorded in the movie.
z
If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject
during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, auto power o will not take eect. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back
images, etc.
z
Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
z
With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each
frame], if the brightness diers greatly from the preceding shot, the camera
may not shoot at the set interval.
224
Time-lapse Movies
z
If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten
the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
z
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
z
The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the
time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a
movie le.
z
If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS
Utility (EOS software), set [
z
: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option
other than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer.
z
During time-lapse movie recording, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
z
Time-lapse movie recording ends if the camera is turned o, and the setting
changes to [Disable].
z
Even if a ash is used, it will not re.
z
The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and
switch the setting to [Disable].
y
Selecting [Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera]
y
Using the shooting mode switch
z
If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white [
s
] icon (
=
194)
is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate. It is
recommended that you start time-lapse movie recording after the white [
s
]
icon disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).
z
With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in
some modes.
225
Time-lapse Movies
z
Using a tripod is recommended.
z
Recording test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended.
z
The movie’s eld of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse
movie recording is approx. 100%.
z
To cancel the time-lapse movie recording, press the <
o
> button. The time-
lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
z
You can play back the recorded time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
z
If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than 48
hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the number
of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
z
Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie le will
still be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.
z
If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
z
YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.
z
You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop
the time-lapse movie recording.
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
y
First, pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (
=
389).
y
Make sure [
z
: Remote control] is set to [Enable].
226
Video Snapshots
Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and
the camera will combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows
these highlights of your trip or event.
Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to
L6X
(NTSC) /
L5X
(PAL).
Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music
(
=
301).
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
1
Select a shooting mode.
z
Select [
k
]
(
=
200)
or
[
M
]
(
=
202)
.
2
Select [z: Video snapshot].
3
Select [Enable].
227
Video Snapshots
4
Select [Album settings].
5
Select [Create a new album].
z
Read the message and select [OK].
6
Specify the playback time.
z
Specify playback time per video
snapshot.
7
Specify the playback eect.
z
This setting determines how fast albums
are played back.
(
1
)
8
Check the required recording time.
z
The time required to record each video
snapshot is indicated (1), based on the
playback time and eect.
228
Video Snapshots
(
2
)
9
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to close the
menu.
z
A blue bar is displayed to indicate the
recording time (2).
10
Record the rst video snapshot.
z
Press the movie shooting button to start
recording.
z
The blue bar indicating recording time
gradually decreases, and after the
specied time elapses, recording stops
automatically.
z
A conrmation message is displayed
(
=
229).
11
Save as a video snapshot album.
z
Select [
J
Save as album].
z
The clip is saved as the rst video
snapshot in the album.
12
Record your next video snapshots.
z
Repeat step 10 to record the next video
snapshot.
z
Select [
J
Add to album].
z
To create another album, select [
W
Save as a new album].
z
Repeat step 12 as needed.
229
Video Snapshots
13
Stop recording video snapshots.
z
Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To
return to normal movie recording, be
sure to specify [Disable].
z
Press the <
M
> button to close
the menu and return to normal movie
recording.
Options in Steps 11 and 12
Function Description
J
Save as album (step 11)
Saves the clip as the rst video snapshot in an
album.
J
Add to album (step 12)
Adds the current video snapshot to the album
recorded most recently.
W
Save as a new album (step 12)
Creates a new album and saves the clip as the
rst video snapshot. This album le is dierent
from the one recorded most recently.
1
Playback video snapshot (steps
11, 12)
Plays the video snapshot just recorded.
r
Do not save to album (step 11)
r
Delete without saving to album
(step 12)
Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot
without saving it to an album. Select [OK] on the
conrmation dialog.
z
If you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show conrm
msg] under [
z
: Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables you to
record the next video snapshot immediately, without a conrmation message.
230
Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
z
Follow step 5 on
=
227 to select [Add
to existing album].
2
Select an existing album.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
existing album, then press <
0
>.
z
Select [OK].
z
Some video snapshot settings will be
updated to match settings of the existing
album.
3
Close the menu.
z
Press the <
M
> button to close the
menu.
z
The video snapshot recording screen is
displayed.
4
Record a video snapshot.
z
Record the video snapshot as described
in step 10 of “Video Snapshot”
(
=
226).
z
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
General Video Snapshot Precautions
z
No sound is recorded when you set [Playback eect] to [1/2x speed] or [2x
speed].
z
Recording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may dier slightly
from the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate
and other factors.
231
Miniature Effect Movie
By blurring image areas outside a selected area, you can record movies
with a miniature model eect applied. By choosing the playback speed
before the movie is recorded, you can also make movies that look like
scenes happening in miniature models, with people and objects in the scene
moving quickly during playback. Sound is not recorded.
1
Select [ ].
z
Press <
0
>, and on the Quick Control
screen, select [
].
z
Select [
], [ ], or [ ] as the
playback speed.
2
Move the scene frame.
z
Use the scene frame to set an area that
will look sharp.
z
To make the scene frame movable
(displayed in orange), press the <
B
>
button or tap [
r
] in the lower right of the
screen.
z
To switch between vertical and
horizontal scene frame orientation, tap
[
T
] in the lower left of the screen.
z
To move a horizontal scene frame,
press the <
W
> <
X
> keys, and to move
a vertical scene frame, press the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys.
z
To return the scene frame to the center
of the screen, tap [
e
] in the lower left
of the screen.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm the position of
the scene frame. Next, set the AF point.
232
Miniature Eect Movie
3
Move the AF point.
z
The AF point turns orange and can be
moved.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
AF point to the position to focus on.
z
Aligning the AF point and scene frame is
recommended.
z
To return the AF point to the center of
the screen, tap [
e
] in the lower left of
the screen.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm the position of
the AF point.
4
Record the movie.
z
Press the movie shooting button.
Estimated playback speed and time for a movie recorded for
one minute
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
z
To make people and objects in the scene move quickly during playback, select
[
], [ ], or [ ] before recording the movie. The scene will resemble a
miniature model.
z
Sound is not recorded.
z
You can switch the scene frame orientation in step 2 with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys when in horizontal orientation or the <
W
> <
X
> keys when in vertical
orientation.
233
Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously
during movie recording.
1
Select [z: Movie Servo AF].
2
Select [Enable].
z
When [Enable] is set:
z
The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
z
To keep the focus at a specic position, or if you prefer not to record
mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie
Servo AF by tapping [
Z
] in the lower left of the screen.
z
When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after
operations such as pressing the <
M
> or <
x
> button or changing
the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
z
When [Disable] is set:
z
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
234
Movie Servo AF
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
z
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult
y
A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
y
A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
y
When shooting with a higher f/number.
y
Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Dicult” (
=
181).
z
Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time (
=
500) will be shortened.
z
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnied view.
z
During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie image
may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnication).
235
Movie Digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during
movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. When using a lens
with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to
<
1
>.
1
Select [z: IS settings].
2
Select [k Digital IS].
3
Select a setting item.
z
Disable (
v
)
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
z
Enable (
w
)
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnied.
z
Enhanced (
x
) (Not displayed for still photos shooting.)
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnied.
236
Movie Digital IS
Combination IS
Even more eective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie
digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical
and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.
z
Movie digital IS has no eect with a lens without Image Stabilizer, or when the
lens IS switch is set to <
2
>. (In this case, when [Enable] or [Enhanced] is
specied, the Movie digital IS icon blinks.)
z
With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not
function.
z
Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less eective at some movie recording
sizes.
z
The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more eective the image
stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less
eective the image stabilization will be.
z
When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
z
Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the eects of the
Movie digital IS.
z
When using a TS-E lens, sh-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital
IS to [Disable] is recommended.
z
Since Movie digital IS magnies the image, the image looks more grainy. Noise,
dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
z
For details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon website.
z
“+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (
=
235) when a lens compatible with
Combination IS is used.
237
Other Menu Functions
[
z
1]
z
Shooting mode
Available options include autoexposure and manual exposure movie
recording.
z
Lens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination and chromatic aberration can be corrected as you
record movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see
=
130.
[
z
2]
z
Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1
with the camera (
=
389).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
For normal movie recording, set the BR-E1 release timing/movie
shooting switch to <
k
>, then press the release button.
For details on Time-lapse movie recording, see
=
225.
238
Other Menu Functions
[
z
3]
z
Exposure compensation
Exposure compensation is available in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3-stop
increments. For details on exposure compensation, see
=
139.
z
k
ISO speed settings
ISO speed
In [
M
] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also
select ISO Auto.
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in Full HD/HD movie
recording in [
k
] mode or in [
M
] mode with ISO Auto.
z
ISO 16000/20000/25600 for Full HD/HD movie recording is an expanded ISO
speed (indicated by [H]).
z
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. For details on
Auto Lighting Optimizer, see
=
143.
z
Highlight tone priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies.
For details on Highlight tone priority, see
=
144.
z
[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with [
z
:
Highlight tone priority] set.
z
Metering timer
For details on the metering timer, see
=
147.
239
Other Menu Functions
[
z
4]
z
White balance
For details on white balance, see
=
149.
z
Custom White Balance
For details on custom white balance, see
=
152.
z
White balance correction
For details on white balance correction, see
=
154.
z
Picture Style
For details on Picture Styles, see
=
156.
[
z
5]
z
AF method
For details on AF methods, see
=
172.
z
Eye Detection AF
For details on Eye Detection AF, see
=
182.
z
Focus mode
For details on focus modes, see
=
184.
240
Other Menu Functions
z
HDMI information display
You can congure information display for
image output via an HDMI cable.
With info
The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is
shown on the other device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen
goes o. Recorded movies are saved to the card.
Clean /
H
output
HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and
AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded
to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
Clean /
L
output
HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information
and AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is
recorded to the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
[
z
6]
z
Lens electronic MF
For details on Lens electronic MF, see
=
185.
z
MF peaking settings
For details on MF peaking settings, see
=
189.
z
IS settings
For details on image stabilization, see
=
190.
241
Other Menu Functions
z
k
Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to record movies
that are brighter than when set to [Disable]
by automatically slowing the shutter speed
under low light.
Applies when the frame rate of the movie
recording size is
8
or
7
.
Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement,
less aected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that
under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable] by
automatically reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25
sec. (PAL) under low light.
z
Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under
low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
242
General Movie Recording Cautions
Red [
E
] Internal Temperature Warning Icon
z
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
recording or under a high ambient temperature, a red [
E
] icon will appear.
z
The red [
E
] icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn o the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
z
Recording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the
red [
E
] icon to appear earlier. When you are not recording, always turn o the
camera.
[
] Display
z
If [
] is displayed, see
=
485.
Recording and Image Quality
z
Image Stabilizer is active all times, even without the shutter button pressed
halfway, when you use an IS-equipped EF-M lens with [IS mode] in [
z
: IS
settings] set to [On] or an EF/EF-S lens with the IS switch set to <
1
>. The
Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
recording time depending on the shooting conditions. Disabling the Image
Stabilizer is recommended when you are using a tripod or other means to
secure the camera.
z
If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie
may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual
exposure.
z
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the
screen.
z
Image noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds,
high temperatures, low shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded
almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in time-lapse movie
recording.
z
If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may decline
or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4 format).
243
General Movie Recording Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
z
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator
may appear on the right of the screen during movie
recording. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal
buer memory). The slower the card, the faster the
indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes
full, movie recording will stop automatically.
z
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not appear or the
level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, record a few test movies to see
if the card can write fast enough.
z
If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
z
If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Audio Restrictions
z
The following restrictions apply when recording movies that include sound.
y
Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
y
When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
(1)
244
245245
Flash Photography
This chapter describes how to shoot with ash.
z
Flash cannot be used while you are recording movies.
246
Flash Photography
Using ash is recommended when the [
I
] icon is displayed on the screen,
when subjects in daytime shots are backlit, or when you shoot under low
light.
1
Use the <I> lever to raise the
ash.
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
z
Conrm that a [
I
] icon appears on the
screen.
3
Take the picture.
z
The ash res according to [Flash
ring] settings (
=
251).
z
To retract the ash after shooting, push
it down with your ngers until it clicks
into place.
Approximate Flash Range
(Maximum approx. range in meters/feet)
ISO Speed
(
=
140)
EF-M15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM
Wide-angle End Telephoto End
f/3.5 f/6.3
400 2.9/9.5 1.6/5.2
3200 8.1/26.6 4.5/14.8
* It may not be possible to obtain standard exposure when shooting distant subjects at
high ISO speeds, or under certain subject conditions.
247
Flash Photography
Shutter Speed and Aperture Value in Flash Photography
Shooting Mode Shutter Speed Aperture Value
d
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Automatically set
s
Manual (1/200–30 sec.) Automatically set
f
Auto (1/200–30 sec.)* Manually set
4
Manual (1/200–30 sec., Bulb) Manually set
* When [Slow synchro] under [
z
: Flash control] is set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
z
Do not use the ash unless it is fully raised.
z
The bottom of images may be dark if light from the ash is obstructed by a lens
hood, or by a subject that is too close.
Flash Photography in [
f
] Mode
Flash output is automatically adjusted to provide suitable ash exposure for
your specied aperture value.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with autoash metering and the
background with a slow shutter speed, to provide standard exposure for
both the subject and background. Using a tripod is recommended.
248
M
Flash Exposure Compensation
Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust ash output.
1
Press <Z>.
2
Press the <M> button.
3
Select [2exp. comp.].
4
Set the compensation amount.
z
To make ash exposure brighter, set the
compensation amount toward [Brighter]
(positive compensation), or to make it
darker, set it toward [Darker] (negative
compensation).
z
After you are nished shooting, follow
steps 1–3 to return the compensation
amount to zero.
z
When [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (
=
143) is set to an option other than
[Disable], images may still look bright even if negative compensation is set.
z
T
he exposure compensation amount will remain in eect even after you turn o the camera.
z
Flash exposure compensation can also be set by turning the <
6
> dial in step 2.
z
You can also set ash exposure compensation with [Built-in ash settings] in
[
z
: Flash control] (
=
254).
249
M
FE Lock
Shooting with FE (ash exposure) Lock provides suitable ash exposure
over your specied area of the subject.
1
Use the <I> lever to raise the
ash.
z
Press the shutter button halfway and
conrm that a [
I
] icon appears on the
screen.
2
Focus on the subject.
3
Press the <A> button (8).
z
Center the subject on the screen, then
press the <
A
> button.
z
A preash is red by the ash, and the
required ash output level is retained.
z
[
d
] is lit.
z
Each time you press the <
A
> button,
a preash is red, and the ash output
required for shooting is retained.
4
Take the picture.
z
Compose the shot and press the shutter
button completely.
z
The [
D
] icon blinks when subjects are too far away and your shots would be
dark. Approach the subject and repeat steps 2–4.
250
Flash Control
Functions of the ash can be set from menu screens on the camera.
1
Select [z: Flash control].
2
Select an item.
251
Flash Control
Flash Firing
Set to [
a
] to have the ash re
automatically, based on shooting
conditions.
Set to [
D
] to have the ash always re
when you shoot.
Set to [
b
] to disable ash ring.
z
The information displayed varies by shooting mode.
z
Can also be set (except in some shooting modes) by pressing the <
D
> button
when the shooting mode switch is set to <
A
> or <
z
>.
E-TTL II Flash Metering
M
For normal ash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the ash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene.
Red-eye Reduction
Set to [Enable] to reduce red-eye by
emitting the red-eye reduction lamp
(
=
36) before ring the ash.
252
Flash Control
Slow Synchro
M
You can set the ash-sync shutter speed
for ash photography in [
f
] Aperture-
priority AE or [
d
] Program AE mode.
z
[ ] 1/200-30sec. auto
The ash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under
some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is
automatically lowered.
z
[ ] 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light
conditions. It is eective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the ash, the
background may come out dark.
z
[ ] 1/200 sec. (xed)
The ash sync speed is xed at 1/200 sec. This more eectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than
with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
z
To use slow-sync shooting in [
f
] or [
d
] mode, set to [1/200-30sec. auto].
253
Flash Control
Built-in Flash Function Settings
M
z
Flash mode
Set to [E-TTL II] to shoot in E-TTL II/E-TTL
fully automatic ash mode.
Set to [Manual ash] to specify your
preferred ash output ([Maximum],
[Medium], or [Minimum]) for [
2
ash
output].
z
Available in [
s
], [
f
], and [
a
]
modes.
254
Flash Control
z
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so
that the ash res immediately after the
exposure starts.
Set to [2nd curtain] and use low shutter
speeds for natural-looking shots of subject
motion trails, such as car headlights.
z
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/80
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/100 sec. or faster, rst-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
z
Flash exposure compensation
Just as exposure compensation is
adjustable, you can also adjust ash output
(
=
248).
Clearing
Built-in Flash Settings
1
Select [Clear settings].
2
Select [OK].
z
The default settings are now restored.
255255
Playback Settings
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back
captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings
on the Playback Settings ([
x
]) tab.
z
Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for
images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that
have been edited or renamed on a computer.
z
Images may be displayed that cannot be used with certain playback
features.
258
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select an image.
z
To play back newer images, press the
<
Z
> button, and to play back older
images, press the <
Y
> button.
z
Each time you press the <
B
> button,
the display will change.
No information Basic information
display
Shooting information
display
3
Exit the image playback.
z
Press the <
x
> button to exit the image
playback.
260
Image Playback
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control
playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones
and similar devices. First, press the <
x
> button to prepare for touch
playback.
Image browsing
Magnied view
Index displayJump display
z
You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one nger.
261
Magnified Image Display
You can magnify your captured images.
(
1
)
1
Magnify the image.
z
During image playback, turn the <
6
>
dial clockwise. In magnied view, the
position of the magnied area (1) is
shown in the lower right of the screen.
2
Scroll the image.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to scroll the
image vertically and horizontally.
z
To keep the same position magnied while switching images, tap [
g
] in
the upper right of the screen, then press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys while [
f
] is
displayed.
262
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
1
Switch to the index display.
z
During image playback, turn the <
6
>
dial counterclockwise.
z
The 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
Turning the <
6
> dial further
counterclockwise switches to 9, 36, and
100-image display.
Turning the dial the other way switches
to 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image
display.
B B B B
2
Select an image.
z
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the
orange frame and select the image.
z
Press <
0
> in the index display to
display the selected image.
263
Movie Playback
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select a movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
movie to play back.
z
In the single-image display, the [
s1
]
icon displayed on the upper left indicates
a movie.
z
In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As rolls cannot be played back
from the index display, press <
0
> to
switch to the single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Press <0> to play back the
movie.
z
The movie will start playing back.
(
1
)
z
You can pause playback and display
the movie playback panel by pressing
<
0
>. Press it again to resume the
playback.
z
You can also adjust the volume during
movie playback by using the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
(1) Speaker
264
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel
Item Playback Operations
7
Play Pressing <
0
> toggles between playback and stop.
8
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys. The
slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T
Skip backward Skips backward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <
0
>.
3
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <
0
>.
Holding <
0
> down will rewind the movie.
6
Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<
0
>. Holding <
0
> down will fast forward the movie.
v
Skip forward Skips forward approx. 4 sec. each time you press <
0
>.
X
Edit Displays the editing screen (
=
266).
I
Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.
Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a
JPEG still image (
=
268).
y
Background music
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(
=
301).
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Volume
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(
=
263).
z
To skip back or forward approx. 4 sec. during movie playback, press the <
Y
>
<
Z
> keys.
265
Movie Playback
Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and Digest
Movies)
Item Playback Operations
7
Play Pressing <
0
> toggles between playback and stop.
8
Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys. The
slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T
Previous clip
Displays the rst frame of the previous clip or video
snapshot.
3
Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <
0
>.
Holding <
0
> down will rewind the movie.
6
Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<
0
>. Holding <
0
> down will fast forward the movie.
v
Next clip Displays the rst frame of the next clip or video snapshot.
L
Erase clip Erases the current clip or video snapshot.
X
Edit Displays the editing screen (
=
266).
y
Background music
Plays back an album with the selected background music
(
=
301).
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Volume
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(
=
263).
z
Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback (
=
272). (Volume cannot be adjusted with the
<
W
> <
X
> keys.)
z
Movie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie les
have corrupted frames.
z
To skip back or forward to the beginning of the previous or next video snapshot
or clip during playback of video snapshot albums or digest movies, press the
<
Y
> <
Z
> keys.
z
For details on the movie recording time available, see
=
500.
266
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the rst and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
Pause movie playback.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
2
On the movie playback panel,
select [X].
3
Specify the part to be edited out.
z
Select either [
U
] (Cut beginning) or [
V
]
(Cut end).
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys for frame-by-
frame playback.
z
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <
0
>. The portion indicated by
a line at the bottom of the screen will
remain.
4
Check the edited movie.
z
Select [
7
] to play the edited movie.
z
To change the edited part, go back to
step 3.
z
To cancel the editing, press the <
M
>
button.
267
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
(2)(1)
5
Save the image.
z
Select [
W
] (1).
z
The save screen will appear.
z
To save it as a new roll, select [New
le]. To save it and overwrite the original
movie le, select [Overwrite].
z
Select [
] (2) to save a compressed
version of the le. A separate version is
saved, with 4K movies compressed and
converted to Full HD.
z
On the conrmation dialog, select [OK]
to save the edited movie and return to
the movie playback screen.
z
Because editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the position
indicated by [
] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies
are trimmed may dier from your specied position.
z
Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
z
You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
z
[
] is not available for movies created with [Save compressed version],
because further compression and saving is not possible.
z
For instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see “Create Album”
(
=
299).
268
Frame Extraction
From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual frames
to save as approx. 8.3 megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images. This
function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
3
> button.
2
Select a 4K movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a 4K
movie or 4K time-lapse movie.
z
On the shooting information screen
(
=
510), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse
movies are indicated by an [
H
] icon.
z
In index display, press <
0
> to switch
to single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Pause movie playback.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
5
Select a frame to grab.
z
Use the movie playback panel to select
the frame to grab as a still photo.
z
For movie playback panel instructions,
see
=
264.
6
Select [I].
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
I
].
269
Frame Extraction
7
Save the image.
z
Select [OK] to save the current frame as
a JPEG still image.
8
Select the image to display.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number.
z
Select [View original movie] or [View
extracted still image].
z
Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse
movies, HD movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a dierent
camera.
270
Digest Movie Editing
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in <
D
> mode can be erased. Be
careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Play back the image.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
2
Select a digest movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
digest movie.
z
In single-image display, digest movies
are labeled with [
s
D
] in the upper
left of the screen.
z
In index display, press <
0
> to switch
to single-image display.
3
In the single-image display, press
<0>.
4
Select [D].
z
Digest movie playback begins.
5
Press <0> to pause the digest
movie.
z
The movie playback panel will appear.
6
Select a clip.
z
Select [
T
] or [
v
] to select a clip.
271
Digest Movie Editing
7
Select [L].
8
Select [OK].
z
The clip is erased, and the digest movie
is overwritten.
z
Video snapshot albums can also be edited. Albums created with [
x
: Create
album] cannot be edited.
z
For other instructions on using the movie playback panel for digest movies, see
“Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums and Digest Movies)” (
=
265).
272
Playback on a TV Set
You can view your shots and movies on a TV by connecting the camera to a
TV with an HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m/8.2 ft., with a Type D terminal
on the camera end).
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [
5
: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your television).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
z
Insert the cable plug in the <
k
>
terminal.
2
Connect the HDMI cable to the
television.
z
Connect the HDMI cable to the
television’s HDMI IN port.
3
Turn on the television and switch
the television’s video input to
select the connected port.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Press the <x> button.
z
The image will appear on the TV screen.
(Nothing will be displayed on the camera
screen.)
z
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
273
Playback on a TV Set
z
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
z
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn o the camera and television.
z
Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut o.
z
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <
k
> terminal.
Doing so may cause a malfunction.
z
Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
z
It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [
5
:
HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (
=
449).
z
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a
television.
274
Protect Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [3: Protect images].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to protect.
(
1
)
4
Protect the image.
z
Press <
0
> to protect the selected
image. The [
K
] icon (1) will appear at
the top of the screen.
z
To cancel the image protection, press
<
0
> again. The [
K
] icon will
disappear.
z
To protect another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
275
Protect Images
Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to protect all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Protect
images].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
The images in the specied range will be
protected and the [
J
] icon will appear.
z
To select another image to be protected,
repeat step 2.
276
Protect Images
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [
3
: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect
all images in folder] or [Unprotect all
images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
310), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all
found].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be protected.
If you select [Unprotect all found], the
protection of all the ltered images will be
canceled.
z
If you format the card (
=
435), the protected images will also be erased.
z
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must rst cancel the protection.
z
If you erase all the images (
=
282), only the protected images will remain.
This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.
277
Rotate Still Photos
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired
orientation.
1
Select [3: Rotate stills].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to rotate.
3
Rotate the image.
z
Each time you press <
0
>, the image
will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° →
270° → 0°.
z
To rotate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
z
If you set [
5
: Auto rotate] to [On
z
D
] (
=
433) before taking vertical shots,
you need not rotate the image with this function.
z
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image
playback, set [
5
: Auto rotate] to [On
z
D
].
278
Change Movie Orientation Information
You can manually change movie orientation information (which determines
which side is up).
1
[x: Change mov rotate info]
2
Select a movie.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a
movie with orientation information to
change.
3
Press <0>.
z
As you watch the image orientation icon
in the upper left of the screen, press
<
0
> to specify which side is up.
z
Orientation information of digest movies and video snapshot albums cannot be
changed.
z
Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [
5
: Add
k
rotate info] (
=
434) setting.
279
Erase Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase
them in one batch. Protected images (
=
274) will not be erased.
z
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer
need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being
erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing a Single Image
1
Select the image to be erased.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to erase.
2
Press the <L> button.
3
Erase the images.
JPEG or RAW images or movies
z
Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG images
z
Select an item.
280
Erase Images
Checkmarking [
X
] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those
images at once.
1
Select [3: Erase images].
2
Select [Select and erase images].
3
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to erase, then press <
0
>.
z
To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
4
Erase the images.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
281
Erase Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to erase all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Erase
images].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
3
Press the <M> button.
4
Erase the images.
z
Select [OK].
282
Erase Images
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [
3
: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
310), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be erased.
z
To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (
=
435).
283
Prepare to Print
All operations in direct printing are performed on the camera, as you view
screens for camera operations.
Connecting the Camera and Printer
1
Prepare the printer.
z
For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
2
Connect the camera to the printer
with an interface cable (sold
separately).
z
As an interface cable, you can use a
IFC-600PCU cable (sold separately).
z
Insert the cord’s plug into the camera’s
digital terminal (USB Micro-B).
z
Connect the cord’s plug to the printer’s
USB terminal.
3
Turn the printer on.
284
Prepare to Print
4
Turn the camera on.
z
Some printers may beep.
z
The image is displayed, along with a
printer connection icon in the upper left
of the screen.
z
Conrm in advance that the printer has a PictBridge-compatible terminal.
z
Movies cannot be printed.
z
Printers only compatible with “CP Direct” or “Bubble Jet Direct” printing cannot
be used.
z
A series of long beeps in step 4 indicates a problem with the printer. Resolve
the problem according to the error message displayed (
=
368).
z
You can also print RAW images captured with this camera.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
z
Turn o the camera and printer before disconnecting the cable, and hold the
cable by the plug when disconnecting it.
z
For direct printing, consider powering the camera with DC Coupler DR-E12 and
Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (each sold separately).
285
Print Images
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer. Also,
certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
(
1
)
1
Select the image to be printed.
z
Conrm that an icon is displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
image to print.
(1) Printer connected icon
2
Press <0>.
B
The print setting screen appears.
z
For setting details, see “Print Settings”
(
=
364).
286
Print Ordering
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on
the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection,
quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photonisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, le number
imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specied
for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Option
1
Select [3: Print order].
2
Select [Set up].
3
Set the options as desired.
z
Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Print type
K
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
sheet.
K
Both Prints both the standard and index prints.
L
Date
On
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
O
File number
On
[On] imprints the le number.
O
287
Print Ordering
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
z
Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to
specify the images to be printed.
z
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting
(
=
286), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case,
resize the image (
=
304), then print the index print.
z
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or le number may not
be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
z
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the
same time.
z
When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specications are
set. You cannot print in the specied print order if you extract just the images
from the card for printing.
z
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photonishers may not be able to print
the images as you specied. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before
printing, or check with your photonisher about compatibility when ordering
prints.
z
Do not use this camera to congure print settings for images with DPOF
settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten
inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the
image type.
288
Print Ordering
Specifying Images for Printing
z
Selecting Images
Select and specify the images one by one.
Press the <
M
> button to save the print
order to the card.
(1) (2)
z
Standard/Both
Press <
0
> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By pressing the <
W
>
<
X
> keys, you can set the number of
copies to be printed up to 99.
(1) Quantity
(2) Total images selected
(3) (4)
z
Index
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark to the
box [
X
]. The image will be included in
the index print.
(3) Checkmark
(4) Index icon
z
Selecting Multiple Images
Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select range].
Selecting the rst and last images of the
range marks all the images in the range
with a checkmark [
X
], and one copy of
each image will be printed.
289
Print Ordering
All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specied.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order
for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specied for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all
the images on the card.
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
310) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all
found images] and [Clear all found images].
All Found Images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images
ltered by the search conditions will be specied for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the ltered
images will be cleared.
z
RAW images or movies cannot be specied for printing. Note that RAW images
or movies will not be specied for printing even if you specify all images with
[Multiple].
z
When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than 400
images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may not all
be printed.
290
Photobook Set-up
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer, the
specied images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder. This
function is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [3: Photobook Set-up].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select the image to be specied.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
image, then press <
0
>.
z
To select other images to be specied
for a photobook, repeat step 3.
291
Photobook Set-up
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range
(start point to end point) of images to be specied for a photobook at once.
1
Select [Multiple].
z
Under [
3
: Photobook Set-up], select
[Multiple].
2
Select [Select range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
A checkmark [
X
] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
rst and last images.
292
Photobook Set-up
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a
photobook.
Under [
x
: Photobook Set-up], you can
set [Multiple] to [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] to specify all the
images in the folder or on the card for a
photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in
folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
310) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found
images] and [Clear all found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be specied for the photobook.
If you select [Clear all found images], all
the photobook order of the ltered images
will be cleared.
z
RAW images or movies cannot be specied for the photobook. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specied for the photobook even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
z
Do not use this camera to congure photobook settings for images with
photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may
be overwritten inadvertently.
293
Creative Filters
You can apply the following lter processing to an image and save it as a
separate image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye eect, Art bold eect,
Water painting eect, Toy camera eect, and Miniature eect.
1
Select [3: Creative lters].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
3
Select a lter eect (=294).
4
Adjust the lter eect.
z
Adjust the lter eect, then press
<
0
>.
z
For the Miniature eect, press the <
W
>
<
X
> <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to move the white
frame indicating the area that looks
sharp, then press <
0
>.
294
Creative Filters
5
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number displayed, then select [OK].
z
To apply lter processing to other
images, repeat steps 2–5.
z
For images captured in RAW+JPEG shooting, lter processing is applied to the
RAW image, and the results are saved as a JPEG.
z
For RAW images captured at a specic aspect ratio, the resulting image is
saved at that aspect ratio after lter processing.
Creative Filter Characteristics
z
I
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast,
you can change the black-and-white eect.
z
G
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the
degree of softness.
z
X
Fish-eye eect
Gives the eect of a sh-eye lens. The image will have barrel distortion.
Depending on the level of this lter eect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, because this lter eect magnies
the center of the image, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels, so set the lter
eect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
295
Creative Filters
z
J
Art bold eect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more three-
dimensional. By adjusting the eect, you can change the contrast and
saturation. Note that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not
be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have
signicant noise.
z
K
Water painting eect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. By
adjusting the eect, you can change the color density. Note that night
scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have signicant noise.
z
H
Toy camera eect
Shifts colors to those typical of toy cameras and darkens the four corners
of the image. Color tone options can be used to change the color cast.
z
c
Miniature eect
Creates a diorama eect. You can change where the image looks sharp.
To switch between vertical and horizontal orientation of the sharp area
(white frame), tap [
T
] at the bottom of the screen in step 4.
296
Creative Assist
You can process RAW images by applying your preferred eects and saving
as JPEGs.
1
Select [3: Creative Assist].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to process, then press <
0
>.
3
Select an eect level.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
eect.
z
By selecting [Preset] and pressing
<
0
>, you can choose [VIVID],
[SOFT], or other preset eects.
[AUTO1], [AUTO2], and [AUTO3] are
eects recommended by the camera
based on image conditions.
297
Creative Assist
z
You can adjust eects such as
[Brightness] or [Contrast] by pressing
<
0
> and then using the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
Press <
0
> when adjustment is
nished.
z
To reset the eect, tap [Reset].
z
To conrm the eect, tap [Save] in the
upper right of the screen.
4
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
z
For details on Creative Assist eects, see
=
80.
298
Red-Eye Correction
Automatically corrects portions of images aected by red-eye from ash.
1
Select [3: Red-eye correction].
2
Select an image with <Y> <Z>.
z
After image selection, either tap [
E
] or
press <
0
>.
z
White frames are displayed around
corrected image areas.
3
Save the image.
z
Select [OK].
z
The image is saved as a separate le.
z
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
299
Create Album
You can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in an album.
1
Select [3: Create album].
2
Select an album to edit.
z
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark [
X
].
z
After selection, press the <
M
>
button.
3
Select [OK].
4
Select an editing option.
300
Create Album
Option Description
T
Rearrange video
snapshots
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to move,
then press <
0
>. Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to move it, then
press <
0
>.
L
Remove video
snapshot
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to delete,
then press <
0
>. Selected video snapshots are labeled [
L
].
To clear the selection and remove [
L
], press <
0
> again.
7
Play video
snapshot
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select a video snapshot to play, then
press <
0
>. Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the volume.
5
Finish editing.
z
Press the <
M
> button when you are
nished editing.
z
Select [
W
] (Finish editing).
6
Save the image.
z
To check your editing, select [Preview].
z
To play an album with background
music, use [Background music] to
select the music (
=
301).
z
Selecting [Save] saves the edited album
as a new album.
z
Video snapshot albums can only be edited once.
301
Create Album
Selection of Background Music
Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you
copy the music to the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).
1
Select [Background music].
z
Set [Background music] to [On].
2
Select the background music.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
music, then press <
0
>. For [Slide
show], you can select multiple tracks.
3
Listen to a sample.
z
To listen to a sample, tap [
7
].
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to adjust the
volume. Tap [
] to stop playback.
z
To delete the music, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys to select it, then tap [Delete].
z
For instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
302
Cropping
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in RAW
cannot be cropped.
1
Select [x: Cropping].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to crop.
3
Set the cropping frame.
z
Press <
0
> to display the cropping
frame.
z
The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
z
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
You can adjust the frame size by pinching in or out on the screen. The
smaller the cropping frame, the more magnied the cropped image will
look.
z
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <
V
> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
303
Cropping
z
Correcting the Tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <
6
> dial to select [
c
],
then press <
0
>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <
6
>
dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments)
on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt
correction, press <
0
>.
z
Changing the Aspect Ratio and Orientation
Turn the <
6
> dial to select [
e
]. Press <
0
> to change the cropping
frame’s aspect ratio.
4
Check the image area to be
cropped.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to select [
b
].
z
The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
5
Save the image.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to select [
W
].
z
Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number, then select [OK].
z
To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to
5.
z
The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the
angle set for tilt correction.
z
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
z
AF point display information (
=
316) will not be appended to the cropped
images.
304
Resizing
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as
a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG
3
,
4
, and
a
images. JPEG
b
and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [3: Resize].
2
Select an image.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to resize.
(
1
)
3
Select the desired image size.
z
Press <
0
> to display the image sizes.
z
Select the desired image size (1).
4
Save the image.
z
Select [OK] to save the resized image.
z
Check the destination folder and image
le number, then select [OK].
z
To resize another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
z
For details on image sizes of resized images, see
=
502.
305
Rating
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (
l
/
m
/
n
/
o
/
p
). This function is
called rating.
* Rating images can help you organize them.
Rating a Single Image
1
Select [3: Rating].
2
Select [Select images].
3
Select the image to be rated.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image to rate.
4
Rate the image.
z
Press <
0
>, and a blue highlight frame
will appear as shown in the screen
shown on the left.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a
rating mark, then press <
0
>.
z
When you append a rating mark to the
image, the number beside the set rating
will increase by one.
z
To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
306
Rating
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst
and last images for a range to rate all the specied images at once.
1
Select [Select range].
z
Select [Select range] in [
3
: Rating].
2
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Next, select the last image (end point).
z
A checkmark [
X
] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
rst and last images.
3
Press the <M> button.
4
Rate the image.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
z
All the images in the specied range will
be rated (same rating) at once.
307
Rating
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [
3
: Rating], when you select [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be rated.
Turn the <
6
> dial to select a rating, then
select [OK].
When you are not rating images or
cancelling the rating, select [OFF].
If the search conditions are set with [
3
: Set image search conditions]
(
=
310), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images ltered by the search conditions will
be rated as specied.
z
Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have
that rating.
z
With [
3
: Set image search conditions] and [
3
: Image jump with
i
],
you can display only the images given a specic rating.
308
Slide Shows
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Specify the images to be played
back.
z
To play back all the images on the card,
go to step 2.
z
If you want to specify the images to be
played back in the slide show, lter the
images with [
3
: Set image search
conditions] (
=
310).
2
Select [3: Slide show].
3
Set the playback as desired.
z
Select [Set up].
z
Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), and [Transition
eect] (eect when changing images)
for the still photos.
z
To play background music, use
[Background music] to select the
music (
=
301).
z
After completing the settings, press the
<
M
> button.
309
Slide Shows
Display time Repeat
Transition eect Background music
4
Start the slide show.
z
Select [Start].
After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
5
Exit the slide show.
z
To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <
M
>
button.
z
To pause the slide show, press <
0
>. During pause, [
G
] will be displayed on
the upper left of the image. Press <
0
> again to resume the slide show.
z
Volume during movie playback can be adjusted by pressing the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
z
During auto playback or pause, you can press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to view
another image.
z
During auto playback, auto power o will not take eect.
z
The display time may dier depending on the image.
310
Set Image Search Conditions
You can lter image display according to your search conditions. After
setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the
found images.
You can also protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other
operations to ltered images.
1
Select [3: Set image search
conditions].
(
1
)
2
Set the search conditions.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select an
item.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to set the
setting.
A checkmark [
X
] (1) is appended to the
left of the item. (Specied as the search
condition.)
z
If you select the item and press <
0
>,
the checkmark [
X
] will be removed. (The
search condition is canceled.)
z
To clear all specied search conditions,
tap [Clear].
Item Description
9
Rating Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
d
Date Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
n
Folder Displays images in the selected folder.
J
Protect Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
f
Type of le Displays images in the selected le type.
311
Set Image Search Conditions
3
Apply the search conditions.
z
Press the <
M
> button and read the
message displayed.
z
Select [OK].
z
The search condition is specied.
(
2
)
4
Display the found images.
z
Press the <
3
> button.
z
Only the images that match the set
conditions (ltered) will be played back.
z
When the images are ltered for display,
the screen will have an outer yellow
frame (2).
312
Image Jump by Swiping
In single-image display, you can swipe left or right with two ngers to jump
forward or back through images according to the jump method set.
1
Select [x: Image jump with i].
2
Select the jump method.
z
With [Jump images by the specied number], you can turn the <
6
> dial to
select the number of images to jump by.
z
When you select [Display by image rating], turn the <
6
> dial to specify the
rating (
=
305). If you browse images with
9
selected, all the rated images
will be displayed.
313
Image Jump by Swiping
(2)(1)
3
Browse by jumping.
z
Press the <
x
> button.
z
In single-image display, swipe left or
right with two ngers.
z
You can browse by the set method.
(1) Jump method
(2) Playback position
z
To search images by shooting date, select [
g
: Date].
z
To search images by folder, select [
h
: Folder].
z
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [
i
: Movies] or [
j
:
Stills] to display one or the other.
314
Playback Information Display
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during
image playback.
1
Select [3: Playback information
display].
2
Add a checkmark [X] next to the
number of screens to display.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select a
number.
z
Press <
0
> to add a checkmark [
X
].
z
Repeat these steps to add a checkmark
[
X
] to the number of each screen to
display, then select [OK].
z
Your selected information can be
accessed by pressing the <
B
>
button during playback.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the
exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for
checking the color saturation and gradation.
315
Playback Information Display
z
[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
(darker on the left and brighter on the right)
while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels
exist for each brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker the image.
The more pixels there are toward the right, the
brighter the image. If there are too many pixels
on the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there
are too many pixels on the right, the highlight
detail will be lost. The gradation in-between will
be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure
level inclination and the overall gradation.
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
Sample Histograms
z
[RGB] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The
horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left
and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels
there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there
are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be
lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too
saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,
you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as
white balance inclination.
316
AF Point Display
You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined
in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple
AF points may be displayed.
1
Select [3: AF point disp.].
2
Select [Enable].
317
View from Last Seen
You can specify which image is displayed rst when you start image
playback.
1
Select [3: View from last seen].
2
Select an item.
z
[Enable]: Playback resumes from the
last image displayed (except when you
have just nished shooting).
z
[Disable]: Playback resumes from your
most recent shot whenever the camera
is restarted.
318
319319
Wireless Settings
This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a
smartphone wirelessly via Bluetooth
®
or Wi-Fi
®
and send images
to devices or Web services, how to control the camera from a
computer or wireless remote control, and other operations.
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage
from erroneous wireless communication settings when using the
camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other
loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish
appropriate security at your own risk and discretion. Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by
unauthorized access or other security breaches.
320
Tab Menus: Wireless Settings
z
Wireless settings 1
=
321
=
403
=
395
=
396
=
397
=
398
z
Wireless settings 2
=
404
z
Wireless communication is not available while the camera is connected via an
interface cable to a computer or other device.
z
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to
devices via Wi-Fi.
z
The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera
(except for [
D
]). Also, for [
l
] and Web services, the camera cannot be
connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
z
The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you turn o the camera, or open the
card slot cover or battery compartment cover.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power o does not
function.
321
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item for the camera to
connect to.
q
Connect to smartphone (
=
323)
Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-
Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones
or tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in this manual).
D
Use with EOS software or other dedicated software
(
=
351)
Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera
remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated application
Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the camera can also be sent to a
computer automatically.
l
Print from Wi-Fi printer (
=
359)
Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via
Wi-Fi to print images.
322
Selection of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Connection
R
Upload to Web service (
=
369)
Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after you complete
member registration (free of charge).
K
Connect to Wireless Remote (
=
389)
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting.
323
Connecting to a Smartphone
You can do the following after pairing the camera with a smartphone
compatible with Bluetooth low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”).
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection using only the smartphone (
=
325).
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is o
(
=
330).
z
Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone
(
=
398).
z
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
329).
You can also do the following after connecting the camera to a smartphone
via Wi-Fi.
z
Browse and save images on the camera from a smartphone (
=
329).
z
Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
329).
z
Send images to a smartphone from the camera (
=
338).
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that
pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
z
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points” (
=
384).
324
Connecting to a Smartphone
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone
The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on
the smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed.
z
Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
z
Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google
Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear
when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
z
For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
z
Sample screens and other details in this guide may not match the actual user
interface elements after camera rmware updates or updates to Camera
Connect, Android, or iOS.
325
Connecting to a Smartphone
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4
Select an item.
z
If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
z
If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone
to access Google Play or App Store and
install Camera Connect.
326
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Pair via Bluetooth].
z
Pairing now begins.
z
To pair with a dierent smartphone after
pairing with one initially, select [OK] on
the screen at left.
Steps on the Smartphone (1)
6
Start Camera Connect.
7
Tap the camera for pairing.
z
If you are using an Android smartphone,
go to step 9.
8
Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
327
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Select [OK].
10
Press <0>.
z
Pairing is now complete, and the camera
is connected to the smartphone via
Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth icon appears on the main
Camera Connect screen.
z
The camera cannot be connected to two or more smartphones at the same time
via Bluetooth. To switch to a dierent smartphone for the Bluetooth connection,
see
=
401.
z
Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s auto
power o is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use
the camera.
Troubleshooting Pairing
z
Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone will
prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again, remove
pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
z
With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send
images to the smartphone (
=
338).
328
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone (2)
11
Tap on a Camera Connect function.
z
In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is
displayed to conrm camera connection.
z
For the Camera Connect functions, see
=
329.
z
When a Wi-Fi connection is established,
the screen for the selected function will
appear.
z
[
q
Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera.
z
The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on
the main Camera Connect screen.
The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now
complete.
z
For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
346).
z
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth
connection.
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, start Camera Connect and tap the function you
will use.
329
Connecting to a Smartphone
[
q
Wi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
z
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Conrm set.
z
You can check the settings.
Error details
z
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the
error.
Camera Connect Functions
Images on camera
z
Images can be browsed, deleted, or rated.
z
Images can be saved on a smartphone.
Remote live view shooting
z
Enables remote shooting as you view a live image on the smartphone.
Auto transfer
z
Enables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a
smartphone automatically as they are captured (
=
337).
Bluetooth remote controller
z
Enables remote control of the camera from a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
z
Auto power o is disabled while you are using the Bluetooth remote
controller feature.
Location information
z
Not supported on this camera.
Camera settings
z
Camera settings can be changed.
330
Connecting to a Smartphone
Maintaining a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is O
Even when the camera is o, as long as it is paired to a smartphone via
Bluetooth, you can use the smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi.
z
Even if the camera is o, tapping
[Images on camera] in the Camera
Connect menu starts a Wi-Fi connection.
z
In iOS, tap [Join] when a message is
displayed to conrm camera connection.
Images on the camera are listed when
the Wi-Fi connection is established.
z
You can use Camera Connect to save images to the smartphone, and
you can delete images on the camera.
z
To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [
] on the main Camera
Connect screen (
=
346).
z
This function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the
smartphone connection information is erased.
331
Connecting to a Smartphone
Canceling the Pairing
Cancel pairing with a smartphone as follows.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
4
Select the smartphone to cancel
paring with.
z
Smartphones currently paired with the
camera are labeled [
s
].
332
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Delete connection
information].
6
Select [OK].
7
Clear the camera information on
the smartphone.
z
In the smartphone’s Bluetooth setting
menu, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
333
Connecting to a Smartphone
Wi-Fi Connection Without Using Bluetooth
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4
Select an item.
z
If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
334
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Connect via Wi-Fi].
(2)
(1)
6
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (
=
395).
z
By selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection
via an access point (
=
384).
335
Connecting to a Smartphone
Steps on the Smartphone
Smartphone’s screen
(sample)
7
Operate the smartphone to
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
function, then tap the SSID (network
name) checked in step 6.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
8
Start Camera Connect and tap the
camera to connect to via Wi-Fi.
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Select [OK].
z
To specify viewable images, press the
<
B
> button. See step 5 on
=
348
to set them.
336
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
The main window of Camera Connect
will be displayed on the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is
now complete.
z
Operate the camera using Camera
Connect (
=
329).
z
For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
346).
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (
=
392).
z
When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the
Quick Control screen during playback (
=
338).
337
Connecting to a Smartphone
Automatic Image Transfer as You Shoot
Your shots can be automatically sent to a smartphone. Before following
these steps, make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-
Fi.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
2
Select [Send to smartphone after
shot].
3
In [Auto send], select [Enable].
4
Set [Size to send].
5
Take the picture.
338
Connecting to a Smartphone
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
1
Play back the image.
2
Press the <Q> button.
3
Select [qSend images to
smartphone].
z
If you perform this step while connected
via Bluetooth, a message is displayed,
and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi
connection.
4
Select sending options and send
the images.
339
Connecting to a Smartphone
(1) Sending Images Individually
1
Select an image to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Send img shown].
z
In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
z
When sending movies, you can select
the image quality of movies to send in
[Quality to send].
(2) Sending Multiple Selected Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send selected].
340
Connecting to a Smartphone
3
Select images to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
z
After selecting the images to send, press
the <
M
> button.
4
Exit image selection.
z
Select [OK].
5
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
6
Select [Send].
341
Connecting to a Smartphone
(3) Sending a Specied Range of Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Select the last image (end point).
z
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial to change
the number of images shown in the
index display.
4
Conrm the range.
z
Press <
0
>.
5
Exit image selection.
z
Press the <
M
>
button, then press
[OK].
342
Connecting to a Smartphone
6
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
7
Select [Send].
343
Connecting to a Smartphone
(4) Sending All Images on the Card
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all card].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4
Select [Send].
344
Connecting to a Smartphone
(5) Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(
=
310).
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all found].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
z
When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4
Select [Send].
345
Connecting to a Smartphone
Ending Image Transfer
Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android)
z
Press the <
M
> button on the image
transfer screen.
z
Select [OK] on the screen on the left
to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi
connection.
Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection
z
Press the <
M
> button on the image
transfer screen.
z
For instructions on disconnecting
from Wi-Fi, see “Terminating Wi-Fi
Connections” (
=
346).
346
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the
camera’s shutter button is pressed.
z
You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
z
You can select up to 999 les at a time.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
z
Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that
time. Note that
b
size still photos are not reduced.
z
Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
Terminating Wi-Fi Connections
Perform either of the following operations.
On the Camera Connect screen, tap
on [
].
On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select
[Disconnect,exit].
z
If the [
q
Wi-Fi on] screen is not
displayed, select [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
z
Select [Disconnect,exit], then select
[OK] on the conrmation dialog.
347
Connecting to a Smartphone
Settings to Make Images Viewable from Smartphones
Images can be specied after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [qConnect to smartphone].
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
4
Select a smartphone.
z
Select the name of the smartphone on
which you want to make the images
viewable.
348
Connecting to a Smartphone
5
Select [Viewable imgs].
6
Select an item.
z
Select [OK] to access the setting
screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the shooting-
date basis. Images shot up to nine days
ago can be specied.
z
When [Images shot in past days] is
selected, images shot up to the specied
number of days before the current date
become viewable. Use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys to specify the number of days, then
press <
0
> to conrm the selection.
z
Once you select [OK], the viewable
images are set.
z
If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote
shooting is not possible.
349
Connecting to a Smartphone
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on
whether a rating is appended (or not
appended) or by the type of rating.
z
Once you select the type of rating, the
viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
(
1
) (
2
)
Select the rst and last images from images
arranged by the le number to specify the
viewable images.
1. Press <
0
> to display the image
selection screen.
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
image.
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2. Select an image as the starting point (1).
3. Use <
Z
> to select an image as the
ending point (2).
4. Select [OK].
350
Connecting to a Smartphone
z
If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
y
Shooting mode switch set to <
k
>: movie recording continues.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
z
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
z
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
z
When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you
press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn o.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
351
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-
Fi and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated
software. Install the latest version of software on the computer before
setting up a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can import images from the camera,
control the camera, and perform other operations.
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [DRemote control (EOS
Utility)].
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
352
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
(2)
(1)
4
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see
=
395.
Steps on the Computer (1)
Computer’s screen (sample)
5
Select the SSID, then enter the
password.
z
On the computer’s network setting
screen, select the SSID checked in step
4.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
353
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
6
Select [OK].
z
The following message is displayed.
“******” represents the last six digits of
the MAC address of the camera to be
connected.
Steps on the Computer (2)
7
Start EOS Utility.
8
In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over
Wi-Fi/LAN].
z
If a rewall-related message is
displayed, select [Yes].
9
Click [Connect].
z
Select the camera to connect to, then
click [Connect].
354
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (3)
10
Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Select [OK].
[
D
Wi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
z
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Conrm set.
z
You can check the settings.
Error details
z
When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs,
you can check the details of the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.
z
Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.
z
To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (
=
392).
355
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
z
If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
y
Shooting mode switch set to <
k
>: movie recording continues.
y
Shooting mode switch not set to <
k
>: movie recording stops.
z
Shooting operations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS
Utility to switch from still photo mode to movie mode.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
z
In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
z
Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
z
In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower
compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects
cannot be displayed smoothly.
356
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images on the Camera Automatically
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images
on the camera to a computer automatically.
Steps on the Computer (1)
1
Connect the computer and access
point and start Image Transfer
Utility 2.
z
The screen to set up pairing is shown
when you follow the instructions
displayed the rst time Image Transfer
Utility 2 starts up.
Steps on the Camera (1)
2
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi settings].
z
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
3
In [Auto send], select [Enable].
357
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
4
Select [OK].
5
Connect to an access point via
Wi-Fi.
z
Establish a Wi-Fi connection between
the camera and the access point
connected to the computer. For
connection instructions, see “Wi-
Fi Connection via Access Points”
(
=
384).
6
Select the computer to pair the
camera with.
Steps on the Computer (2)
7
Pair the camera and computer.
z
Select the camera, then click [Pairing].
358
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
8
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi settings].
z
Select [Auto send images to
computer].
9
Select [Image sending options].
10
Select what to send.
z
If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range
to send], specify the images to send on
the [Select images to send] screen.
z
After the settings are complete, turn the
camera o.
Images on the camera are automatically sent to the active computer when
you turn the camera on within range of the access point.
z
If images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.
359
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the
camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN) via Wi-Fi. For
printer operating instructions, refer to the printer user manual.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [lPrint from Wi-Fi printer].
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
360
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
(2)
(1)
4
Check the SSID (network name)
and password.
z
Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
z
In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password will
not be displayed or required (
=
395).
5
Set up the printer.
z
On the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer
to be used, select the SSID you have
checked.
z
For the password, enter the password
checked in step 4.
6
Select the printer.
z
In the list of detected printers, select the
printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
z
If your preferred printer is not listed,
selecting [Search again] may enable
the camera to nd and display it.
z
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points” (
=
384).
361
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Image Printing
Printing Images Individually
1
Select the image to be printed.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to print, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Print image].
3
Print the image.
z
For the print setting procedures, see
=
364.
z
Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.
362
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing According to Specied Image Options
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Print order].
3
Set the printing options.
z
For the print setting procedures, see
“Print Ordering” (
=
286).
z
If the print order is complete before
establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to
step 4.
4
Select [Print].
z
[Print] can be selected only when an
image is selected and the printer is
ready to print.
5
Set the [Paper settings] (=364).
363
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
6
Print the image.
z
When [OK] is selected, printing starts.
z
Shooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.
z
Movies cannot be printed.
z
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
z
Certain printers may not be able to imprint the le number.
z
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
z
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright
background or on the border.
z
RAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing,
select [Print image] and print.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
z
Depending on the image’s le size and image quality, it may take some time to
start printing after you select [Print].
z
To stop printing, press <
0
> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].
z
When printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume
printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not
resume if any of the following occurs.
y
You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before
resuming printing.
z
If a problem occurs during printing, see
=
368.
364
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Print Settings
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.
Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Print setting screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)(8)
(6)
(1) Sets date or le number printing (
=
366).
(2) Sets the printing eects (
=
366).
(3) Sets the number of copies to print (
=
366).
(4) Sets the print area (
=
367).
(5) Sets the paper size, type, and layout (
=
365).
(6) Returns to the image selection screen.
(7) Starts the printing.
(8) The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.
365
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Paper Settings
z
Select [Paper settings].
[
Q
] Setting the Paper Size
z
Select the size of the paper in the
printer.
[
Y
] Setting the Paper Type
z
Select the type of the paper in the
printer.
[
U
] Setting the Page Layout
z
Select the page layout.
z
If the image’s aspect ratio is dierent from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped signicantly when you print it as a borderless print.
Images may also be printed at lower resolution.
366
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
[
I
] Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting
z
Select [
I
].
z
Select what to print.
[
E
] Setting the Printing Eects (Image Optimization)
z
Select [
E
].
z
Select printing eects.
z
If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed
(H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
z
The [Default] setting for printing eects and other options are the printer’s
own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s
instruction manual to nd out what the [Default] settings are.
[
R
] Setting the Number of Copies
z
Select [
R
].
z
Select the number of copies to print.
367
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Cropping the Image
Set cropping immediately before
printing. Changing other print settings after
you crop images may require you to crop
the images again.
1
On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2
Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
z
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape
of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
You can adjust the frame size by pinching in or out on the screen.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use the <
V
> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame
Tap [
T
] on the screen to switch the cropping frame between vertical
and horizontal orientation.
3
Press <0> to exit the cropping.
z
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print
setting screen.
368
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
z
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you
specied.
z
The smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are
printed.
Handling Printer Errors
z
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on
resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Error Messages
z
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the camera
screen. After xing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to x a
printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
z
Conrm that paper is loaded correctly.
Ink Error
z
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
z
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
z
The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a dierent camera or
images edited with a computer may not be printable.
369
Sending Images to a Web Service
This section describes how to use Web services to send images.
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
z
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
z
Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions of
browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings required for
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.
z
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/
cig/).
z
For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to
the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
z
If you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend to
use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you will
register.
z
Fees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access your
provider’s access point are charged separately.
370
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone.
Steps on the Camera (1)
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [RUpload to Web service].
3
Select [I Agree].
4
Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
z
Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.
Go to step 7 on
=
385.
371
Sending Images to a Web Service
5
Enter your email address.
z
Enter your email address, then select
[OK].
6
Enter a four-digit number.
z
Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
then select [OK].
7
Select [OK].
z
The [
R
] icon changes to [
].
372
Sending Images to a Web Service
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
8
Set up camera web link.
z
Access the page in the notication
message.
z
Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera web link settings
page.
Steps on the Camera (2)
9
Add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a
destination.
z
Select [
].
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now
added.
373
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering Other Web Services
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
1
Congure the Web service you
want to use.
z
Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
website and access the camera web link
settings page.
z
Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
Steps on the Camera
2
Add the Web service you
congured as a destination.
z
Select [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
z
Select [
].
374
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images
You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from
the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web
links of the online albums.
Connecting to Web Services via Wi-Fi
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select a Web service.
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
A screen to select a destination may be
displayed, depending on the type and
settings of the Web service (
=
387).
375
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images Individually
1
Select an image to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to select images from
index display.
2
Select [Send img shown].
z
In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
376
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send selected].
3
Select images to send.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
images to send, then press <
0
>.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial
counterclockwise to switch to three-
image display for image selection. To
return to single-image display, turn the
<
6
> dial clockwise.
z
After selecting the images to send, press
the <
M
> button.
377
Sending Images to a Web Service
4
Select [Size to send].
z
When YouTube is selected as the
destination, [Size to send] is not
displayed.
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
5
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
378
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending a Specied Range of Images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send range].
3
Specify the range of images.
z
Select the rst image (start point).
z
Select the last image (end point).
Images will be selected and [
X
] will
appear.
z
To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
z
You can turn the <
6
> dial to change
the number of images shown in the
index display.
4
Conrm the range.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
379
Sending Images to a Web Service
5
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
6
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
380
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending All Images on the Card
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all card].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
4
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
381
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Set Image Search Conditions”
(
=
310).
1
Press <0>.
2
Select [Send all found].
3
Select [Size to send].
z
On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
382
Sending Images to a Web Service
4
Select [Send].
z
On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
z
When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
z
To scroll the screen, use the <
W
> <
X
>
keys.
383
Sending Images to a Web Service
z
With a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be
taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
z
When sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has
not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be
checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then
try sending the image again.
z
Depending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can be sent
and the length of movies will be limited.
z
Certain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all card],
or [Send all found].
z
When you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are
resized. Note that movies or
b
size still photos are not reduced.
z
[Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same model
as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without resizing.
z
When accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you can check the send history
for the Web services that the images were sent to.
z
When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
384
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point
compatible with WPS (PCB mode).
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
z
When [
q
Connect to smartphone]
is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed. If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
z
On the [Connect to smartphone]
screen displayed next, select [Connect
via Wi-Fi].
385
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
4
Select [Switch network].
z
Displayed when [
q
], [
D
], or [
l
] is
selected.
5
Select [Connect with WPS].
z
For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 5, see
=
387.
6
Select [WPS (PBC mode)].
z
Select [OK].
7
Connect to the access point via
Wi-Fi.
z
Press the access point’s WPS button.
z
Select [OK].
386
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
8
Select [Auto setting].
z
Select [OK] to access the setting screen
for the Wi-Fi function.
z
If an error occurs with [Auto setting],
see
=
387.
9
Specify the settings for the Wi-Fi
function.
[qConnect to smartphone]
z
On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen,
tap the SSID (network name) shown on
the camera, then enter the password of
the access point for the connection.
Go to step 8 on
=
335.
[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]
Go to step 7 or 8 on
=
353.
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]
Go to step 6 on
=
360.
Registering CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Go to step 5 on
=
371.
387
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Send To Screen
A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web
service.
To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer.
For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
z
The [Send to] screen may be displayed.
z
Select the destination from the list of
registered destinations.
z
The procedures for setting up a
connection and sending images are the
same as those for other Web services.
Camera Access Point Mode
Camera access point mode is a connection
mode for connecting the camera directly to
each device via Wi-Fi.
Displayed when [
q
], [
D
], or [
l
] is
selected in [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection].
Manual IP Address Setup
The items displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function.
1
Select [Manual setting].
z
Select [OK].
388
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
2
Select an item.
z
Select an item to access the screen for
numerical input.
z
To use a gateway, select [Enable], then
select [Address].
3
Enter the desired values.
z
Turn the <
6
> dial to move the input
position in the upper area and use the
<
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the number.
Press <
0
> to enter the selected
number.
z
Press the <
M
> button to delete a
character.
4
Select [OK].
z
When you have completed setting the
necessary items, select [OK].
z
If you are not sure what to enter, see
“Checking Network Settings” (
=
421),
or ask the network administrator or
another person knowledgeable about
the network.
389
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (
=
193).
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [KConnect to Wireless
Remote].
3
Select [Add a device to connect to].
4
Pair the devices.
z
When the [Pairing] screen appears,
press and hold the <W> and <T>
buttons on the BR-E1 simultaneously for
at least 3 sec.
z
After a message conrms that the
camera is paired with the BR-E1, press
<
0
>.
390
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Still Photo Shooting
5
Set up the camera for remote
shooting.
z
Set [Drive mode] on the [
z
] tab to [
Q
]
(
=
137).
Movie Recording
z
In [Remote control] on the [
z
] tab,
select [Enable].
z
For instructions after the pairing
is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s
Instruction Manual.
z
Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto
power o is activated.
z
When you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting [Bluetooth settings] to
[Disable] in step 1 is recommended.
391
Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a dierent BR-E1, clear the information about the
connected remote control.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select [KConnect to Wireless
Remote].
3
Select [Delete connection
information].
4
Select [OK].
392
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered
connection settings.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi
from the displayed history. If the item is
not displayed, use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys
to switch screens.
z
If [Connection history] is set to
[Hide], the history will not be displayed
(
=
395).
3
Operate the connected device.
[q] Smartphone
z
Start Camera Connect.
z
If the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same
access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi, “_
Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
393
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
[D] Computer
z
On the computer, start the EOS software.
z
If the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore
the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access
point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi, “_
Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
[l] Printer
z
If the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the
setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point
as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi, “_
Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
394
Registering Multiple Connection Settings
You can register up to 10 connection settings for the wireless communication
functions.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
z
For details on [
q
Connect to
smartphone], see “Connecting to a
Smartphone” (
=
323).
z
For details on [
D
Remote control (EOS
Utility)], see “Connecting to a Computer
via Wi-Fi” (
=
351).
z
For details on [
l
Print from Wi-Fi
printer], see “Connecting to a Printer
via Wi-Fi” (
=
359).
z
When sending images to a Web service,
see “Sending Images to a Web Service”
(
=
369).
z
To delete connection settings, see
=
401.
395
Wi-Fi Settings
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi settings].
2
Select an item.
z
Wi-Fi
When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited,
such as on board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable] or [Airplane
mode] (
=
403).
z
Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a
password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi).
z
Connection history
You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide] the history of the Wi-Fi
connected devices.
z
Auto send images to computer
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send
images on the camera to a computer automatically (
=
356).
z
Send to smartphone after shot
Your shots can be sent to a smartphone automatically (
=
337).
z
MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the camera.
396
Bluetooth Settings
1
Select [k: Bluetooth settings].
2
Select an item.
z
Bluetooth
If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable].
z
Check connection information
You can check the name and communication status of the paired device.
z
Bluetooth address
You can check the camera’s Bluetooth address.
398
Geotagging Images with GPS Information
from Other Devices
You can geotag images with a Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
Complete these settings after installing the dedicated Camera Connect app
(
=
324) on the smartphone.
1
On the smartphone, activate
location services.
2
Establish a Bluetooth connection.
z
Connect the camera to a smartphone
via Bluetooth (
=
325).
3
Select [k: GPS settings].
4
Select [GPS via mobile].
5
Select [Enable].
6
Take the picture.
z
Images are geotagged with the
information from the smartphone.
399
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
GPS Connection Display
You can check the status of acquiring location information from a
smartphone by referring to [GPS] display on screens for still photo shooting
or movie recording (
=
503 and
=
505, respectively).
z
Gray: Location services are o
z
Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
z
On: Location information acquired
Geotagging images as you shoot
Images captured while [GPS] is on are geotagged.
Geotagging information
You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting
information screen (
=
258,
=
314).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Latitude
(2) Longitude
(3) Elevation
(4) UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
400
Geotagging Images with GPS Information from Other Devices
z
The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the
camera via Bluetooth.
z
Direction information is not acquired.
z
Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
z
It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after
you turn the camera on.
z
Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
y
Pairing with a wireless remote control via Bluetooth
y
Turning the camera o
y
Quitting Camera Connect
y
Deactivating location services on the smartphone
z
Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
y
The camera power turns o
y
The Bluetooth connection is ended
y
The smartphone’s remaining battery level is low
z
Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
z
For movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.
401
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection
rst.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Select an item.
z
If the history (
=
392) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <
Y
> <
Z
>
keys.
3
Select [Edit/delete device].
z
You can change the Bluetooth
connection by selecting a smartphone
labeled with [
s
] in gray. After the
[Connect to smartphone] screen is
displayed, select [Pair via Bluetooth],
then press <
0
> on the next screen.
4
Select the device for which to
change or delete the connection
settings.
402
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
5
Select an item.
z
Change or delete the connection
settings on the displayed screen.
z
Change device nickname
You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (
=
406).
z
Viewable imgs (
=
347)
Displayed when [
q
Connect to smartphone] is selected. Settings will
appear at the bottom of the screen.
z
Delete connection information
When deleting connection information for a paired smartphone, also
delete the camera information registered on the smartphone (
=
331).
z
For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to delete the
connection settings.
403
Airplane Mode
You can temporarily disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions.
1
Select [k: Airplane mode].
2
Set to [On].
z
[
] is displayed.
404
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings
to Default
All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless
communication settings, you can prevent their information from being
exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people.
1
Select [k: Clear wireless settings].
2
Select [OK].
z
Information in wireless communication settings is retained even if you select
[Basic settings] in [
5
: Reset camera].
z
If you have paired the camera with a smartphone, on the smartphone’s
Bluetooth settings screen, delete the connection information of the camera for
which you restored default wireless communication settings.
405
View Info Screen
You can check error details and the camera’s MAC address.
1
Select [k: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
2
Tap [View info].
z
The [View info] screen will appear.
z
When an error has occurred, press <
0
> to display the error content.
406
Virtual Keyboard Operations
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (7) (8)
(6)
(1) Input area, for entering text
(2) Cursor keys, for moving in the
input area
(3) Current no. of characters/no.
available
(4) Keyboard
(5) Switch input modes
(6) Space
(7) Delete a character in the input
area
(8) Finish the text entry
z
To move the cursor within (1), turn the <
6
> dial.
z
To move within (2) and (4)–(7), use the <
V
> cross keys.
z
Press <
0
> to conrm input or when switching input modes.
407
Responding to Error Messages
When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the
procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the
examples shown in this chapter.
z
On the [View info] screen, press <
0
> (
=
405).
z
Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.
Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the
corresponding page.
11 (
=
408) 12 (
=
408) 21 (
=
409) 22 (
=
410)
23 (
=
411) 61 (
=
412) 63 (
=
413) 64 (
=
413)
65 (
=
414) 66 (
=
414) 67 (
=
414) 68 (
=
415)
69 (
=
415) 91 (
=
415) 121 (
=
415) 125 (
=
416)
126 (
=
416) 127 (
=
416) 141 (
=
416) 142 (
=
416)
151 (
=
417) 152 (
=
417)
z
When an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth connection] screen. It is no longer displayed after the camera is
turned o.
408
Responding to Error Messages
11: Connection target not found
z
In the case of [
q
], is Camera Connect running?
B
Establish a connection using Camera Connect (
=
335).
z
In the case of [
D
], is the EOS software running?
B
Start the EOS software and reestablish the connection (
=
353).
z
In the case of [
l
], is the power of the printer on?
B
Turn on the printer.
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the
authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera (
=
406).
12: Connection target not found
z
Is the power of the target device and access point on?
B
Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a
connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to
establish the connection again.
409
Responding to Error Messages
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
z
On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct
setting?
B
If no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP
address to [Manual setting] on the camera (
=
387).
What to check on the DHCP server
z
Is the power of the DHCP server on?
B
Turn on the DHCP server.
z
Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
B
Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
B
Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the
network to reduce the number of addresses in use.
z
Is the DHCP server working correctly?
B
Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DHCP server.
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP
server is available.
410
Responding to Error Messages
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
z
On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the
server’s actual address?
B
Set the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set
the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used
(
=
387,
=
421).
What to check on the DNS server
z
Is the power of the DNS server on?
B
Turn on the DNS server.
z
Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding
names correct?
B
On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding
names are entered correctly.
z
Is the DNS server working correctly?
B
Check the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DNS server.
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS
server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
z
Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a
router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
B
If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway
address and enter it on the camera (
=
421,
=
387).
B
Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on
all network devices including the camera.
411
Responding to Error Messages
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
What to check on the camera
z
Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same
network have the same IP address?
B
Change the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address
as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address
of the device that has a duplicate address.
B
If the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network
environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto
setting] (
=
386).
Responding to Error Messages 21–23
z
Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
y
This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is case-sensitive,
so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the correct
password for authentication is set on the camera (
=
406).
412
Responding to Error Messages
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
z
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
B
Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (
=
418).
What to check on the camera
z
Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
B
Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the
camera.
What to check at the access point
z
Is the access point turned on?
B
Turn on the power of the access point.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
405).
413
Responding to Error Messages
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication
method?
B
The camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open
system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
405).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
B
The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
405).
414
Responding to Error Messages
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
z
Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
B
Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (
=
418).
z
The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
B
The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access
point from another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in
use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or
inuence of rain or high humidity (
=
418).
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
B
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method
z
Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
B
The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
z
If ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
B
Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(
=
405).
415
Responding to Error Messages
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the
beginning.
z
Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
button for the specied period of time?
B
Hold down the WPS button for the period of time specied in the
access point’s instruction manual.
z
Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point?
B
Try establishing the connection when both devices are within reach
of each other.
69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot
connect. Retry from the beginning.
z
Connection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton
Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
B
Wait a while before trying to establish the connection.
91: Other error
z
A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.
B
Turn the camera’s power switch o and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
z
The target Web server does not have enough free space.
B
Delete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space
on the Web server, then try sending the data again.
416
Responding to Error Messages
125: Check the network settings
z
Is the network connected?
B
Check the connection status of the network.
126: Could not connect to server
z
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated
temporarily.
B
Try connecting to the Web service again later.
127: An error has occurred
z
A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the
camera is connected to the Web service.
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
141: Printer is busy. Try connecting again.
z
Is the printer performing a printing process?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
printing process is nished.
z
Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the Wi-
Fi connection to the other camera has been terminated.
142: Could not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try
again.
z
Is the power of the printer on?
B
Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the
printer.
417
Responding to Error Messages
151: Transmission canceled
z
Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.
B
Restart the camera to resume automatic image transfer.
152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock
z
Is the card’s write protect switch set to the locked position?
B
Slide the card’s write protect switch to the writing position.
418
Wireless Communication Function Notes
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems
occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following
corrective actions.
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not
be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case,
bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-
Fi connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
z
When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using
the camera.
z
Install the device where people or objects do not come between the
device and the camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the inuence of the following
electronic devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices
to transmit communication.
z
The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio
waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission
rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar
devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
419
Wireless Communication Function Notes
Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras
z
When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make
sure the cameras’ IP addresses are dierent.
z
When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the
transmission rate drops.
z
When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points,
leave a gap of ve channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio
wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2
and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
z
BR-E1 cannot be used while the camera and smartphone are paired via
Bluetooth. Change the camera connection to the wireless remote control
in [
K
Connect to Wireless Remote] under [
k
: Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection].
420
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
z
Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
z
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly
secure your network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.
421
Checking Network Settings
z
Windows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipcong/all and press
the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.
z
Mac OS
In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifcong -a, and
press the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the computer is
indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on
the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP address
assigned to the camera in the processes described on
=
387.
Example: 192.168.1.10
422
Wireless Communication Status
Wireless communication status can be checked on the screen.
Information display screen
during shooting
Information display screen
during playback
(
1
)
(
3
) (
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
) (
2
)
(1) Wi-Fi function
(2) Bluetooth function
(3) Wireless signal strength
423
Wireless Communication Status
Communication Status
Screen
Wi-Fi Function Wireless Signal Strength
Not
connected
Wi-Fi: Disable
O
Wi-Fi: Enable
Connecting
(Blinking)
Connected
Sending data
(Animated)
Connection error
(Blinking)
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth Function Connection Status Screen
[Enable]
Bluetooth connected
s
Bluetooth not connected
s
[Disable] Bluetooth not connected Not displayed
z
“Bluetooth not connected” status is indicated when connected to computers,
printers, or Web services via Wi-Fi.
424
425425
Function Settings
This chapter describes menu settings on the function settings ([
5
])
tab.
z
A
M
icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is
available only in advanced shooting modes ([
d
], [
s
], [
f
],
or [
a
]) or [
k
] movie modes ([
k
] or [
M
]).
428
Select Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are
to be saved.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [5: Select folder].
2
Select [Create folder].
3
Select [OK].
429
Select Folder
Selecting a Folder
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
z
Select a folder on the folder selection
screen.
z
Captured images are stored in your
selected folder.
(1) Number of images in folder
(2) Lowest le number
(3) Folder name
(4) Highest le number
Folders
z
A folder can contain up to 9999 images (le number 0001–9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created
automatically. Also, if manual reset (
=
432) is executed, a new folder will be
created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
z
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize
your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”. The
rst three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last ve
characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A
to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note
that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for
example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining ve characters
in each name are dierent.
430
File Numbering
The captured images saved in a folder are
assigned a le number from 0001 to 9999.
You can change how the image les are
numbered.
1
Select [5: File numbering].
2
Set the item.
z
Select [Numbering].
z
Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
z
If you want to reset the le numbering,
select [Manual reset] (
=
432).
z
Select [OK] to create a new folder, and
the le number will start with 0001.
z
If the le number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even
if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message telling
you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
(Example)
IMG_0001.JPG
File number
431
File Numbering
Continuous
When you wish to continue the le numbering sequence even
after the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the le numbering
continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in
multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to use continuous le numbering, it is recommended that you use a newly-
formatted card each time.
100
0051
101
0052
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 1
0051 0052
(1)
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 2Card 1
(1) Next sequential le number
432
File Numbering
Auto Reset
When you wish to restart the le numbering from 0001 each
time the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the le numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize
images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to save images with the le numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
0051 0001
(1)
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 2Card 1
100
0051
101
0001
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 1
(1) File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
When you wish to reset the le numbering to 0001 or to start
from le number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the le numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the le numbering of images saved to that folder starts
from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use dierent folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
433
Auto Rotate
You can change the auto rotation setting that
straightens images shot in vertical orientation when
they are displayed.
1
Select [5: Auto rotate].
2
Select an item.
z
On
z
D
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
z
On
D
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
z
O
z
Images captured with auto rotation set to [O] will not rotate during playback
even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
z
If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, auto rotation to the
proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
z
If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
434
Adding Orientation Information to Movies
For movies recorded with the camera held vertically, orientation information
indicating which side is up can be added automatically to enable playback
in the same orientation on smartphones or other devices.
1
Select [5: Add k rotate info].
2
Select an item.
z
Enable
Play movies on smartphones or other devices in the orientation in which
they were recorded.
z
Disable
Play movies horizontally on smartphones or other devices, regardless of
the recording orientation.
z
Movies are played horizontally on the camera, regardless of the [
5
: Add
k
rotate info] setting.
435
Format Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera.
z
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a
computer, etc. before formatting the card.
1
Select [5: Format card].
2
Format the card.
z
Select [OK].
z
For low-level formatting, press the
<
B
> button to add a checkmark
<
X
> to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
z
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the
capacity indicated on the card.
z
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
436
Format Card
Format the Card in the Following Cases:
z
The card is new.
z
The card was formatted by a dierent camera or a computer.
z
The card is full of images or data.
z
A card-related error is displayed (
=
495).
Low-Level Formatting
z
Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
z
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
z
During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting
[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be complete
and you can use the card as usual.
Card’s File Formats
z
SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
z
When recording a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie will
be recorded in a single le (instead of being split into multiple les) even
if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie le will exceed 4 GB.)
z
It may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other
cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some
computer operating systems or card readers.
z
Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards, take
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying
cards.
437
Eco Mode
You can conserve battery power while the shooting screen is displayed.
When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
1
Select [5: Eco mode].
2
Select [On].
z
If the camera is not used, the screen
dims in approx. 2 sec. and then turns o
in approx. 10 sec.
z
To reactivate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen has been o
for less than about three minutes, press the shutter button halfway.
z
The camera turns itself o automatically after about three minutes of inactivity
once the screen is o.
438
Power Saving
You can adjust the timing of when the screen and camera turn o
automatically ([Display o] and [Auto power o]).
1
Select [5: Power saving].
2
Select an item.
z
Even when [Auto power o] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn o after
the time set in [Display o].
z
[Display o] and [Auto power o] settings do not apply when Eco mode is
set to [On].
440
Date/Time/Zone
When you turn on the power for the rst time or if the date/time/zone have
been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone rst.
By setting the time zone rst, you can simply adjust this setting as needed
in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and
time information, be sure to set your date/time.
1
Select [5: Date/Time/Zone].
2
Set the time zone.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [Time
zone].
z
Press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
time zone, then press <
0
>.
z
If your time zone is not listed, press the
<
M
> button, then set the dierence
from UTC in [Time dierence].
441
Date/Time/Zone
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select
a [Time dierence] item (+/–/hour/
minute), then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
z
After entering the time zone or time
dierence, use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to
select [OK], then press <
0
>.
3
Set the date and time.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select an
item, then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to set it, then
press <
0
>.
4
Set the daylight saving time.
z
Set it as necessary.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [
Y
],
then press <
0
>.
z
Use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select [
Z
],
then press <
0
>.
z
When the daylight saving time is set to
[
Z
], the time set in step 3 will advance
by 1 hour. If [
Y
] is set, the daylight
saving time will be canceled and the
time will go back by 1 hour.
5
Exit the setting.
z
Use the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select [OK].
442
Date/Time/Zone
z
The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed
to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set
them once again.
z
After changing [Zone/Time dierence], check that the correct date/time are
set.
z
The date/time/zone must be set to enable normal camera temperature control.
Once the date/time/zone are set, temperature warnings can be displayed
correctly.
z
Auto power o time may be extended while the [
5
: Date/Time/Zone] screen is
displayed.
443
Language
1
Select [5: LanguageK].
2
Set the desired language.
444
Shutter Button Function for Movies
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway
or completely during movie recording.
1
Select [5: Shutter btn function for
movies].
2
Select an item.
z
Half-press
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
z
Fully-press
This item is displayed when the shooting
mode switch is set to <
k
>.
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button completely.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording with the movie shooting button or by pressing the shutter button
completely.
z
[Half-press] switches from [Meter.+One-Shot AF] to [Meter.+
k
Servo AF]
when [Movie rec. size] is set to [
H
].
445
Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the frame rates available when you record movies.
1
Select [5: Video system].
2
Select an item.
z
For NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC
(North America, Japan, South Korea,
Mexico, etc.).
z
For PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL
(Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
446
Touch Control
1
Select [5: Touch control].
2
Select an item.
z
[Standard] is the normal setting.
z
[Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch-screen panel response than
[Standard].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
z
Do not use sharp objects such as ngernails or ballpoint pens for touch
operations.
z
Do not use wet ngers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or
if your ngers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction
may occur. In this case, turn o the power and wipe o the moisture with a
cloth.
z
Attaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen
may degrade the touch operation response.
z
If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be poor.
447
Screen Autolock Settings
To make the camera less likely to detect unintended touch-screen
operations, you can disable shooting screen touch operations after a
specied period.
1
Select [5: Screen autolock
settings].
2
Set [Screen autolock] to [Enable].
3
Set [Time until locked].
z
Screen autolock is activated after your
specied time elapses without any
camera operations while the shooting
screen is displayed.
z
Pressing any button cancels screen
autolock.
z
Screen autolock is disabled when menus or playback screens are displayed,
when the screen is facing subjects, and when the camera is autofocusing or
shooting.
448
Beeping
You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations.
1
Select [5: Beep].
2
Select an item.
Touch
The beeper will be silent only for touch
operations.
Disable
Disables beeping when subjects are in
focus, when shooting with the self-timer,
when using touch operations, and at other
times.
449
HDMI Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a
television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1
Select [5: HDMI resolution].
2
Select an item.
Auto
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you
prefer to avoid display or delay issues
when the camera switches resolution.
450
HDMI HDR Output
You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR
TV.
1
Select [5: HDMI HDR output].
2
Select [On].
z
Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch
inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
z
Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
z
Some image eects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.
451
Shooting Information Display
You can customize the information shown when you are shooting.
Select [5: Shooting info. disp.].
Grid Display
1
Select [Grid display].
2
Select an item.
452
Shooting Information Display
Histogram
1
Select [Histogram disp].
2
Select an item.
453
Reverse Display
A mirror image can be displayed when you shoot with the screen rotated
toward the subject (toward the front of the camera).
1
Select [5: Reverse display].
2
Select [On].
z
Select [O] if you prefer not to reverse
display when the screen is rotated
toward the front.
454
Display Performance
You can specify smooth display or power saving display in still photo
shooting.
1
Select [5: Disp. performance].
2
Select an item.
455
M
Reset Camera
You can restore default camera settings in [
d
], [
s
], [
f
], [
a
], [
k
],
and [
M
] shooting modes.
1
Select [5: Reset camera].
2
Select [Basic settings].
z
To clear other settings, select [Other
settings], then select an item.
3
Select [OK].
z
Basic settings such as [Language
K
] and [Date/Time/Zone] are not restored
to defaults.
z
Dots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen if the
sensor is aected by cosmic rays or similar factors. If so, it may help to reduce
their appearance by doing one of the following with [Basic settings] selected:
(1) Hold down the <
I
> button and press the <
M
> button, or (2) Select
[Basic settings], press <
0
>, then select [OK] (but note that (2) restores
default camera settings).
456
M
Copyright Information
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as
Exif information.
1
Select [5: Copyright information].
2
Select an item.
3
Enter text.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys to select a
character, then press <
0
> to enter it.
z
To switch input modes, select [
] and
press <
0
>.
z
To delete the previous character, select
[
] and press <
0
>.
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
457
Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.]
in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete
the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
z
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely
when you select [Display copyright info.].
z
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software).
458
Manual/Software URL
To download instruction manuals, select
[
5
: Manual/software URL] and scan the
displayed QR code with a smartphone.
You can also use a computer to access the
website at the URL displayed and download
software.
Certification Logo Display
M
Select [
5
: Certication Logo Display] to
display some of the logos of the camera’s
certications. Other certication logos can
be found on the camera body and the
camera’s package.
Firmware
M
Select [
5
: Firmware] to update the
rmware of the camera or current lens.
459459
Custom Functions (C.Fn)
You can ne-tune camera functions and change the functionality of
buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences.
460
M
Setting Custom Functions
1
Select [Custom Functions(C.Fn)].
(
1
)
2
Select a Custom Function number
(1).
z
Press the <
Y
> <
Z
> keys to select the
Custom Function number, then press
<
0
>.
3
Change the setting as desired.
z
Press the <
W
> <
X
> keys to select the
desired setting (number), then press
<
0
>.
z
To set up another Custom Function,
repeat steps 2–3.
z
At the bottom of the screen, the current
Custom Function settings are indicated
below the respective function numbers.
4
Exit the setting.
z
Press the <
M
> button.
Clearing all Custom Functions
All Custom Function settings you have set are cleared by selecting [
5
:
Reset camera], [Other settings], then [Custom Functions(C.Fn)]
(
=
455).
461
M
Custom Function Setting Items
Custom Functions are organized into two groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Others.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1 ISO expansion
0: O
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you can set “H” (equivalent to ISO 51200)
for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) for movies. Note that
if [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], “H”
cannot be selected.
z
For 4K movies, the ISO speed range is ISO 100–6400, even when [ISO
expansion] is set to [1: On].
C.Fn-2 Safety shift
0: Disable
1: Enable
You can shoot with the shutter speed and aperture value automatically
adjusted to enable standard exposure if standard exposure would not
be available under your specied shutter speed or aperture value in
[
s
] or [
f
] mode.
462
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn II: Others
C.Fn-3 Shutter/AE lock button
0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press
the <
A
> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button halfway to
apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
During Servo AF, you can press the <
A
> button to pause the AF
operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown o by
any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is
set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects that keep moving and stopping repeatedly.
During Servo AF, you can press the <
A
> button to start or stop the
Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is
taken. Thus, you can set your camera to always maintain the optimum
focusing and exposure and wait for the decisive moment.
z
With setting 1 or 3, pressing the <
A
> button during movie recording starts
One-Shot AF.
C.Fn-4
z
Movie shooting button function
You can change the <
o
> movie shooting button function during still photo
shooting.
0: Movie record start/stop
1: Depth-of-eld preview
Stops the lens down to the specied aperture value, enabling you to
check the range of focus (depth of eld).
2: Disabled
Disables the <
o
> button, so that pressing it has no eect.
463
Custom Function Setting Items
C.Fn-5 Release shutter without lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without
a lens attached to the camera.
0: Disable
1: Enable
C.Fn-6 Retract lens on power o
Lens retraction setting for gear-driven EF or EF-S STM lenses (such as EF
40mm f/2.8 STM) attached to the camera. You can specify whether to retract
lenses that are extended in use automatically when you turn the camera o.
0: Enable
1: Disable
z
Retraction is not activated by auto power o (except for EF-M lenses).
z
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
z
When [0:Enable] is set, this function takes eect regardless of the lens’s focus
mode switch setting (AF or MF).
464
465465
My Menu
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently.
z
The [
9
: My Menu] tab is not displayed when [Menu display]
on the [
j
: Display level settings] tab is set to [Guided]. To
set up My Menu, change [Menu display] to [Standard].
467
M
Registering My Menu
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions
whose settings you change frequently.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
2
Select [OK].
z
You can create up to ve My Menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
Select [9: Congure].
468
Registering My Menu
2
Select [Select items to register].
3
Register the desired items.
z
Select the item to be set, then press
<
0
>.
z
Select [OK] on the conrmation dialog.
z
You can register up to six items.
z
To return to the screen in step 2, press
the <
M
> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the menu
tab.
z
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort
registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press <
0
>. With
[
z
] displayed, use the <
W
> <
X
> keys to move the item, then press
<
0
>.
z
Delete selected items/Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the
registered items under the tab.
469
Registering My Menu
z
Delete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete
the [MY MENU*] tab.
z
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1
Select [Rename tab].
2
Enter text.
z
Select [
] and press <
0
> to delete
any unneeded characters.
z
Use the <
V
> cross keys to select a
character, then press <
0
> to enter it.
z
To switch input modes, select [
] and
press <
0
>.
3
Conrm input.
z
Press the <
M
> button, then press
[OK].
470
Registering My Menu
Deleting all My Menu tabs/Deleting all items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered under
them.
z
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete
all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will
be deleted and the [
9
] tab will revert to its default.
z
Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]
is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be
deleted.
z
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
471
Registering My Menu
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear rst when
you press the <
M
> button.
z
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
z
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [
9
] tab selected.
z
Display only My Menu tab
Only the [
9
] tab is displayed. (The [
z
], [
3
], [
k
], [
5
], and [
j
] tabs
will not be displayed.)
472
473473
Reference
474
Software
You can download the latest version of EOS software or other dedicated
software from the Canon website.
Downloading and Installing the EOS Software or Other
Dedicated Software
Always install the latest version of the software.
Update any previous versions that are installed by overwriting them with the
latest version.
z
Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The
software will not be installed correctly.
z
The software cannot be installed unless the computer is connected to the
Internet.
z
Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly. Also,
processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
1
Download the software.
z
Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
z
Enter the serial number on the back of the screen, then download
the software.
z
Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer le to start the installer.
For Macintosh
A dmg le will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.
475
Software
(1) Double-click the dmg le.
B
A drive icon and installer le will appear on the desktop.
If the installer le does not appear, double-click the drive icon
to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer le.
B
The installer starts.
2
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF les) can be downloaded from the
Canon website to your computer.
z
Software Instruction Manual Download Site
www.canon.com/icpd
z
To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF les), an Adobe PDF viewing
software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version
recommended) is required.
z
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
z
Double-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF le) to open it.
z
To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section.
476
Importing Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.
There are two ways to do this.
Connecting to a Computer via an Interface Cable (sold
separately)
1
Install the software (=474).
2
Connect the camera to the
computer with an interface cable
(sold separately).
z
As an interface cable, you can use a
IFC-600PCU cable (sold separately).
z
Insert the cord’s plug into the camera’s
digital terminal (USB Micro-B).
z
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal (USB Type-A).
3
Use EOS Utility to import the
images.
z
Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
z
With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.
477
Importing Images to a Computer
Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1
Install the software (=474).
2
Insert the card into the card reader.
3
Use Digital Photo Professional to
import the images.
z
Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
z
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
478
Household Power Outlet Accessory
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E12 and Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700 (each sold
separately).
1
Insert the coupler.
z
Turn the camera o.
z
Open the cover and insert the coupler
with the terminals facing as shown.
z
Close the cover.
(
2
)
(
1
)
2
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
z
Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler terminal.
3
Connect the power cord.
z
Insert one end of the power cord into
the compact power adapter and plug the
other end into a power outlet.
z
When nished using the camera, turn it
o and unplug the power cord from the
outlet.
z
Do not use an AC adapter other than the Compact Power Adapter CA-PS700.
z
Do not plug in or unplug the adapter or power cord while the camera is on.
z
When nished using the camera, turn it o and unplug the power cord from the
outlet.
479
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, rst refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact
your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.
z
Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E12.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
z
In case of battery charger problems, the orange charge lamp blinks and
a protective circuit stops charging. If this happens, unplug the charger
plug from the power outlet, remove and reinsert the battery, and wait a
while before plugging the charger into the power outlet again.
The camera is not activated even when turned on.
z
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (
=
46).
z
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (
=
46).
z
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (
=
48).
z
Charge the battery (
=
44).
The access lamp is still lit when the camera is o.
z
The access lamp remains on while the camera is recording images to the
card. The access lamp goes o after image recording is nished, and the
power turns o automatically.
480
Troubleshooting Guide
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
z
Use a fully charged battery (
=
44).
z
The battery performance may have degraded. If the battery performance
is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
z
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
z
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
z
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
z
Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
z
Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
The camera turns o by itself.
z
Auto power o is in eect. To deactivate auto power o, set [Auto power
o] under [
5
: Power saving] to [Disable] (
=
438).
z
Even if [Auto power o] is set to [Disable], the screen will still turn
o after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Display o], but the
camera will remain on.
z
Set [
5
: Eco mode] to [O].
481
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
z
To attach EF/EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera
cannot be used with RF lenses.
No images can be shot or recorded.
z
Make sure the card is properly inserted (
=
48).
z
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (
=
48).
z
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make
space (
=
48,
=
279).
z
Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to
focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or
focus manually (
=
59,
=
187).
The card cannot be used.
z
If a card error message is displayed, see
=
50 or
=
495.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in
another camera.
z
Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this
camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed
and it may not be possible to use the card.
482
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.
z
Set [
z
: Focus mode] to [AF] (
=
184).
z
When using a lens with a focus mode switch, set the switch to <AF>
(
=
57).
z
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (
=
59).
z
In [
z
: IS settings], set [IS mode] to [On] (
=
190).
z
When using a lens with an Image Stabilizer switch, set the switch to
<
1
> (
=
190).
z
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (
=
108), set a higher ISO speed (
=
140), use ash (
=
245),
or use a tripod.
z
See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on
=
77.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
z
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus locked is
not possible with Servo AF (
=
78,
=
169).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
z
The continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting may be lower,
depending on conditions such as these: battery level, temperature,
shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation,
type of lens, use of ash, and shooting settings (
=
136).
483
Troubleshooting Guide
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
z
If you shoot a subject that has ne detail such as a eld of grass, the le
size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the
number listed on
=
497.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
z
The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards,
even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown in
the table on
=
497 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the
card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) For
this reason, the maximum burst displayed may dier from the actual
maximum burst.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image
comes out bright.
z
Set [
z
: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (
=
143). When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or ash exposure compensation, the image may come out
bright.
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
the available ISO speed range starts at ISO 200.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], H
(expanded ISO speed) is not available, even with [ISO expansion] in [
5
:
Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On].
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], you can set ISO
100/125/160 or H (expanded ISO speed).
484
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual
exposure and ISO Auto are set.
z
See
=
113 to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
z
Although [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diraction correction] are
not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both
functions are applied in shooting, as when set to [Enable].
z
During movie recording, [Distortion correction], [Digital Lens
Optimizer], or [Diraction correction] will not be displayed.
The ash does not re.
z
Shooting with the ash may be temporarily disabled to protect the ash
head if the ash is used repeatedly over a short period.
Using ash in [
f
] or [
d
] mode lowers the shutter speed.
z
To provide standard exposure for subjects and backgrounds, the shutter
speed is automatically reduced (slow-sync shooting) for shots under
low light in night scenes or with similar backgrounds. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [
z
: Flash control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/200-
1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (xed)] (
=
252).
The specied exposure changes when I shoot with ISO Auto
using ash.
z
When there is a risk of overexposure in ash photography, shutter
speed or ISO speed is automatically adjusted to reduce loss of detail in
highlights and shoot at standard exposure. In ash shots with certain
lenses, shutter speeds and ISO speeds displayed when you press the
shutter button halfway may not match the actual settings used. This may
alter the brightness of backgrounds that are out of ash range.
z
To avoid shooting at dierent shutter speeds or ISO speeds than
displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in [
d
], [
s
], [
f
],
or [
a
] mode, shoot with a manually set ISO speed.
485
Troubleshooting Guide
Remote control shooting is not possible.
z
When taking still photos, set the drive mode to [
Q
] (
=
137). When
recording movies, set [
z
: Remote control] to [Enable] (
=
237).
z
Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
z
If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see
=
193,
=
389.
A white
s
or red
E
icon is displayed during still photo shooting.
z
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image quality
of still photos may be worse when a white [
s
] icon is displayed. If the
red [
E
] icon is displayed, it indicates that the shooting will soon stop
automatically (
=
194).
During movie recording, the red
E
icon is displayed.
z
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red [
E
]
icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop
automatically (
=
242).
[
] is displayed.
z
[
] may be displayed after repeated movie recording, or if you keep the
camera standing by for movie recording over extended periods (except
when set to
L6
/
L5
).
The camera turns o automatically in approx. 3 min. if you continue
recording while [
] is displayed. The camera may also turn o
automatically while standing by for movie recording when [ ] is
displayed. Turn o the camera when [ ] is displayed, and wait to allow
the camera to cool down.
z
The date/time/zone must be set to enable normal camera temperature
control. Once the date/time/zone are set, temperature warnings can be
displayed correctly.
z
If [Overheated! Shutting down.] is displayed, turn o the camera and
wait at least 3 min. Note that the camera should be o for 9 min. or more
if you will record a 4K movie up to 9 min. 59 sec. or a high frame rate
movie up to 7 min. 29 sec. (Actual movie recording times may be shorter,
depending on the recording environment and conditions of use.)
486
Troubleshooting Guide
Movie recording stops by itself.
z
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see
=
499. To nd out
the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc.
z
If you record a 4K movie for 9 min. 59 sec. or a Full HD/HD movie for 29
min. 59 sec., the movie recording stops automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
z
ISO speed is set automatically in [
k
] recording mode. In [
M
] mode,
you can manually set the ISO speed (
=
501).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot be
selected during movie recording.
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the available ISO
speed range starts at ISO 200.
z
H (expanded ISO speed) is not available when [
z
: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Enable], even with [ISO expansion] in [
5
: Custom
Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On].
z
When [
z
: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], you can set ISO
100/125/160 or H (expanded ISO speed).
z
H (expanded ISO speed) is not available (not displayed) in 4K movie
recording.
487
Troubleshooting Guide
The exposure changes during movie recording.
z
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie recording, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
z
Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may
cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven
audio level, or loss of focus.
The image ickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
recording.
z
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by uorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
movie recording. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In [
M
] mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce
the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie
recording.
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
z
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.
I cannot take still photos during movie recording.
z
Still photos cannot be taken with the shooting mode switch set to <
k
>.
Before taking still photos, set the switch to <
z
>, then select a shooting
mode for still photos.
488
Troubleshooting Guide
Problems with Wireless Features
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
z
Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specication Version 4.1 or
later.
z
Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
z
Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of
charge) on the smartphone (
=
324).
z
A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again
if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case,
remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on
the smartphone and try pairing again (
=
331).
Wi-Fi function cannot be set.
z
If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an
interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface
cable before setting any functions (
=
320).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
z
Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected
to devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection before connecting
the interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
z
With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and
playback may not be possible.
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
489
Troubleshooting Guide
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
z
Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you
have changed the settings or selected a dierent setting, reconnection
may not be established even after selecting the same SSID. In this case,
delete the camera connection settings from the Wi-Fi settings on the
smartphone and set up a connection again.
z
A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when
you recongure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect
for a moment and then restart it.
Operation Problems
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
z
For movie recording, check the [
5
: Shutter btn function for movies]
setting (
=
444).
z
Check settings for [Shutter/AE lock button] and [
z
Movie shooting
button function] in [
5
: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] (
=
462).
490
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
z
Some tabs and items are not displayed in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene,
and Creative lters modes. Tabs and items on the menu screen also vary
for still photos and movies.
z
The [
9
: My Menu] tab is not displayed when [Menu display] on the
[
j
: Display level settings] tab is set to [Guided]. To set up My Menu,
change [Menu display] to [Standard].
The display starts with [
9
] My Menu, or the [
9
] tab alone is
displayed.
z
[Menu display] on the [
9
] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or
[Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (
=
471).
The le name’s rst character is an underscore (“_”).
z
Set [
z
: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the rst
character will be an underscore (
=
155).
The le name starts with “MVI_”.
z
It is a movie le.
The le numbering does not start from 0001.
z
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (
=
430).
491
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
z
Make sure the correct date and time are set (
=
440).
z
Check the time zone and daylight saving time (
=
440).
The date and time are not in the image.
z
The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date
and time recorded in the shooting information (
=
286).
[###] is displayed.
z
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
The screen does not display a clear image.
z
If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
z
The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
492
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
A red box is displayed on the image.
z
[
3
: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (
=
316).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
z
The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are
played back:
z
Images captured in [
F
] or [
G
] Special scene modes.
z
Images captured in [
A
], [
B
], [
C
], or [
D
] Creative lters modes.
z
Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
z
Cropped images.
The image cannot be erased.
z
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (
=
274).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
z
The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another
camera.
z
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
z
The images have been ltered for playback with [
3
: Set image search
conditions] (
=
310). Clear the image search conditions.
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during
movie playback.
z
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie recording, the
operation sound will also be recorded.
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
z
If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie recording, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In this case, shoot in the [
M
] mode (
=
202).
493
Troubleshooting Guide
No picture appears on the television.
z
Make sure [
5
: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
correctly for the video system of your television (
=
445).
z
Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (
=
272).
There are multiple movie les for a single movie recording.
z
If the movie le size reaches 4 GB, another movie le will be created
automatically (
=
212). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted
with the camera, you can record a movie in a single le even if it exceeds
4 GB.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
z
Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating
system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In this case,
connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable, then
import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software).
The image cannot be resized.
z
With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG
b
and RAW images
(
=
304).
The image cannot be cropped.
z
With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (
=
302).
494
Troubleshooting Guide
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
z
Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (
=
474).
z
If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with
any computer connected with an interface cable.
Communication between the connected camera and computer
does not work.
z
When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [
z
: Time-lapse movie] to
[Disable] (
=
217).
495
Error Codes
(
1
)
(
2
)
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the on-
screen instructions. If the problem persists,
write down the error code (Err xx) and
contact a Canon Service Center.
(1) Error number
(2) Cause and countermeasures
496
Performance Data
Still Photo Shooting
z
Number of Possible Shots
Approx. 315 shots (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• Based on using the screen and a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12, and following
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
z
ISO Auto Range
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed
No Flash With Flash
d
/
s
/
f
/
a
ISO 100–25600* ISO 100–1600*
* Varies depending on [Max for Auto] setting.
• ISO speed is set automatically in [
A
], [
D
], Special scene, and Creative filters
modes.
• For bulb exposure, the value is automatically set to ISO 400.
497
Performance Data
z
Guide to Image Quality Settings
(Approx.)
Image Quality
Pixels
Recorded
File Size (MB) Possible Shots
Maximum
Burst
JPEG
73
24M
8.4 3600 71
83
4.5 6610 71
74
11M
4.6 6480 70
84
2.6 11400 70
7
a
5.9M
3.1 9690 70
8
a
1.8 16010 70
b
3.8M 1.8 16340 70
RAW
1
24M 27.2 1120 13
F
24M 15.8 1930 31
RAW+JPEG
1
73
24M
24M
27.2+8.4 850 12
F
73
24M
24M
15.8+8.4 1250 22
• Number of possible shots and maximum burst as measured using a 32 GB UHS-I
card conforming to Canon testing standards.
• File size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst vary depending on shooting
conditions (such as aspect ratio, subject, memory card brand, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings).
z
Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.
498
Performance Data
z
Pixel Count at Specic Aspect Ratios
(Approx. pixels)
Image Quality 3:2 4:3
1
/
F
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels) 6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
3
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels) 5328×4000 (21.3 megapixels)*
a
3984×2656 (10.6 megapixels) 3552×2664 (9.5 megapixels)
a
2976×1984 (5.9 megapixels) 2656×1992 (5.3 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2112×1600 (3.4 megapixels)*
Image Quality 16:9 1:1
1
/
F
6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels) 6000×4000 (24.0 megapixels)
3
6000×3368 (20.2 megapixels)* 4000×4000 (16.0 megapixels)
a
3984×2240 (8.9 megapixels)* 2656×2656 (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976×1680 (5.0 megapixels)* 1984×1984 (3.9 megapixels)
b
2400×1344 (3.2 megapixels)* 1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
z
The image area displayed for the asterisked “*” aspect ratio may be slightly
dierent from the actual image area. Check the captured images on the screen
during shooting.
z
The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
dier from the aspect ratio indicated.
z
For details on JPEG le sizes, see the values on
=
497. Under equivalent
shooting conditions, le sizes will be smaller than when [
z
: Still img aspect
ratio] is set to [3:2].
499
Performance Data
Movie Recording
z
Cards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Size SD Card
H
45 X
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
L
87 X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
65 X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
w
23
X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
87 X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
• When [
k
Digital IS] is disabled.
• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording
movies (card performance requirements).
500
Performance Data
z
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
(Approx.)
Movie Recording Size
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
File Size
8 GB 32 GB 128 GB
H
45 X
8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 860 MB/min.
L
87 X
17 min. 1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 43 min. 431 MB/min.
65 X
35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 9 hr. 23 min. 216 MB/min.
w
23
X
20 min. 1 hr. 22 min. 5 hr. 28 min. 371 MB/min.
87 X
40 min. 2 hr. 42 min. 10 hr. 49 min. 187 MB/min.
• When [
k
Digital IS] is disabled.
z
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie recording
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (
=
242).
z
Total Possible Time for Movie Recording
Approx. 90 min. (at a room temperature of 23°C/73°F)
• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12.
• With [Movie rec. size] under [
z
: Movie rec quality] set to
L6X
(NTSC) or
L5X
(PAL), and with [
z
: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].
501
Performance Data
ISO Speed in Movie Recording
In [
k
]/[
M
] mode, when set to ISO Auto
z
ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800 for Full HD/
HD movies and ISO 100–6400 for 4K movies.
z
The maximum value in the automatic setting range is expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600) in Full HD/HD movie recording when [ISO
expansion] in [
5
: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] is set to [1: On] (
=
461)
and then [Max for Auto] in [
z
:
k
ISO speed settings] is set to [H
(25600)] (
=
238). Note that in 4K movie recording, maximum ISO
speed expansion is not available ([Max for Auto] is not available), even
with [ISO expansion] set to [1: On]).
z
With [
z
: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (
=
144), the
minimum value in the automatic setting range is ISO 200. Maximum ISO
speed expansion is not performed, even with [Max for Auto] set to [H
(25600)].
In [
M
] mode with ISO speed set manually
z
ISO speed can be set manually in a range of ISO 100–12800 for Full HD/
HD movies and ISO 100–6400 for 4K movies.
z
The maximum value in the manual setting range is expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 25600) in Full HD/HD movie recording with [ISO
expansion] in [
5
: Custom Functions(C.Fn)] set to [1: On]. Note that in
4K movie recording, maximum ISO speed expansion is not available ([H]
is not displayed), even with [ISO expansion] set to [1: On].
z
With [
z
: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (
=
144), the
minimum value in the manual setting range is ISO 200. Maximum ISO
speed expansion is not performed, even with [ISO expansion] set to [1:
On].
502
Performance Data
Image Playback
z
Resize Options by Original Image Quality
Original Image
Quality
Available Resize Settings
4
a b
3
k k k
4
k k
a
k
z
Size for Resized Images
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
3:2 4:3
4
3984×2656 (10.6 megapixels) 3552×2664 (9.5 megapixels)
a
2976×1984 (5.9 megapixels) 2656×1992 (5.3 megapixels)
b
2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2112×1600 (3.4 megapixels)*
Image
Quality
16:9 1:1
4
3984×2240 (8.9 megapixels)* 2656×2656 (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976×1680 (5.0 megapixels)* 1984×1984 (3.9 megapixels)
b
2400×1344 (3.2 megapixels)* 1600×1600 (2.6 megapixels)
z
The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
dier from the aspect ratio indicated.
z
The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
503
Information Display
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <
B
> button, the information display will change.
z
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(14)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(1) Movie recording time available
(2) Maximum burst
(3) Possible shots/Sec. until self-
timer shoots
(4) Multi Shot Noise Reduction
(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(6) Focus method
(7) AF operation
(8) Metering mode
(9) Drive mode/Self-timer
(10) Image quality
(11) Movie recording size
(12) AF point
(13) Grid lines
(14) Battery level
(15) Histogram
(16) Temperature warning
(17) Limited movie recording available
(18) Quick Control
(19) White balance/White balance
correction
(20) Picture Style
(21) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(22) Creative lters
(23) Still image aspect ratio
(24) Touch Shutter
(25) Metering area
504
Information Display
(27)
(26)
(28)
(29)
(32)
(31)
(30)
(33)
(34)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(36)
(37)
(35)
(26) Flash exposure compensation/
Flash output level
(27) Camera shake warning
(28) Self Portrait
(29) Flash mode/FE lock
(30) AE lock
(31) Shutter speed
(32) Aperture value
(33) Exposure level indicator
(34) GPS acquisition status
(35) Wi-Fi function
(36) Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
(37) Bluetooth function
(38) Magnify button
(39) ISO speed
(40) Highlight tone priority
(41) Exposure simulation
(42) Exposure compensation
z
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
505
Information Display
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the <
B
> button, the information display will change.
z
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(23)
(21)
(22)
(1) Movie orientation information
(2) Battery level
(3) Movie recording time available/
Elapsed recording time
(4) Recording mode/Time-lapse
movie
(5) Focus method
(6) Movie self-timer
(7) Movie recording size
(8) Movie digital IS
(9) Video snapshot
(10) Movie Servo AF
(11) Sound recording o
(12) AF point
(13) Temperature warning
(14) Limited movie recording available
(15) Histogram (for manual exposure)
(16) Quick Control
(17) Movie recording start button
(18) White balance/White balance
correction
(19) Picture Style
(20) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(21) Miniature eect movie
(22) GPS acquisition status
(23) Magnify button
506
Information Display
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(24) Sound-recording level indicator
(manual)
(25) Output without information display
(26) AE lock
(27) Shutter speed
(28) Aperture value
(29) Exposure level indicator
(30) Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
(31) Bluetooth function
(32) ISO speed
(33) Highlight tone priority
(34) Wi-Fi function
(35) Exposure compensation
z
The grid, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie recording. (The
display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)
z
When movie recording starts, the movie recording time available will change to
the elapsed recording time.
z
Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
507
Information Display
Scene Icons
In the [
A
] or [
D
] shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Background
Portrait Non-Portrait
Background
Color
In Motion
*
1
Nature/
Outdoor
Scene
In
Motion
*
1
Close
*
2
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset *
3
*
3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blueDark
With Tripod
*
1
*
4
*
5
*
3
*
4
*
5
*
3
*1: Not displayed during movie recording.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a
tripod.
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM • EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
z
For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
508
Information Display
Playback Screen
z
Basic information display for still photos
(1) (8)
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(15)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(2)
(1) Wi-Fi function
(2) Wi-Fi signal strength/Airplane
mode
(3) Battery level
(4) Playback No./Total images/
Number of found images
(5) Shutter speed
(6) Aperture value
(7) Exposure compensation amount
(8) Bluetooth function
(9) Already sent to a computer/
smartphone
(10) Rating
(11) Image protection
(12) Folder number-File number
(13) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
(14) Highlight tone priority
(15) ISO speed
z
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.
z
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
509
Information Display
z
Detailed information display for still photos
(1)
(8)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(14)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(2)
(1) Aperture value
(2) Shutter speed
(3) Shooting mode
(4) White balance
(5) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(6) White balance correction
(7) Picture Style/Settings
(8) Exposure compensation amount
(9) Shooting date and time
(10) Histogram
(11) ISO speed
(12) Highlight tone priority
(13) Flash exposure compensation/
HDR shooting/Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
(14) Metering mode
(15) File size
(16) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image le size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect
ratio set (
=
127) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* During ash photography without ash exposure compensation, [
0
] will be displayed.
* [
M
] will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* [
u
] will be displayed for images created and saved after performing resizing,
cropping, Creative Assist, or red-eye correction.
* [
N
] will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.
510
Information Display
z
Detailed information display for movies
(1)
(3)
(2)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(7)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Quick Control
(2) Movie playback
(3) Recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Video snapshot
(4) Movie orientation information
(5) Image size
(6) Frame rate
(7) Movie digital IS
(8) Recording time
(9) Movie recording format
(10) Compression method
z
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold]
of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
511
Trademarks
z
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
z
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
z
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
z
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
z
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
z
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
z
WPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi
Protected Setup.
z
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
z
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
512
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use
for MPEG-4 standard.”
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES
IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“ AVC VIDEO’’) AND/
OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
513
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as malfunction, re, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be
covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
z
Battery Pack LP-E12 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents
for which Canon cannot be held liable.
514
Numbers
1-point AF : 172
,
177
[4K] 3840×2160 (Movie) : 207
4K frame capture : 268
Roman
A
Access lamp : 47
,
49
Accessories : 3
Add movie orientation/rotation info : 434
Adobe RGB : 155
Advanced shooting modes : 105
AE lock : 191
AF
AF-assist beam : 171
,
186
AF method : 172
AF operation : 169
AF point selection : 177
Area AF frame : 88
Beep (Beeper) : 448
Continuous AF : 183
Eye detection AF : 182
Lens electronic MF : 185
Manual focus : 187
Recomposing : 78
Album (video snapshot) : 226
,
299
ALL-I : 209
Ambience priority (AWB) : 151
Angle of view : 55
Aperture-priority AE : 110
Area AF frame : 88
Art bold eect : 295
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 74
Aspect ratio → Still image aspect ratio
Attenuator : 216
Autofocus → AF
Auto Lighting Optimizer : 143
Auto power o : 438
Auto reset : 432
Auto rotate : 433
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 110
B
Background music : 301
Basic information display : 508
Basic shooting modes : 73
Battery → Power
Beep (Beeper) : 448
Bluetooth function : 323
,
389
Address : 396
Connecting : 325
Bulb exposure : 114
BUSY : 126
C
Camera
Camera vibration blur : 115
,
138
Default settings : 455
Holding the camera : 58
Camera shake : 59
,
77
Card requirements : 210
,
499
Cards : 11
,
35
,
48
Formatting : 435
Low-level formatting : 435
Troubleshooting : 50
,
481
Write protection : 48
Center-weighted average metering : 145
Certication Logo : 458
Charger : 40
,
44
Charging : 44
Chromatic aberration correction : 133
Close-up : 89
Color space : 155
Color temperature : 153
Color tone : 160
Combination IS : 236
Continuous (le numbering) : 431
Index
515
Index
Continuous shooting : 135
Contrast : 143
,
160
Copyright information : 456
Creative Assist : 80
,
296
Creative lters : 293
Cropping (images) : 302
Custom Functions : 459
Custom white balance : 152
D
Date/time : 440
Daylight saving time : 441
DC coupler : 478
Default settings : 455
Custom Functions : 460
Flash function settings : 254
My Menu : 470
Wireless communication : 404
Depth-of-eld preview : 111
Dial : 60
Diraction correction : 133
Digital Lens Optimizer : 132
Digital terminal : 476
Display level : 62
Display o : 438
Distortion correction : 131
Double-tap : 260
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) : 286
Dragging : 70
Drive mode : 135
E
Eco mode : 437
Erasing (images) : 279
Err (error codes) : 495
Error messages : 495
Evaluative metering : 145
exFAT : 212
,
436
Expanded ISO speed : 140
,
238
,
501
Exposure compensation : 139
Exposure compensation in M mode with
ISO Auto : 113
Exposure level indicator : 504
Exposure simulation : 148
F
Face+Tracking : 172
,
175
FAT32 : 212
,
436
Feature guide : 64
FE lock : 249
File extension : 124
,
209
File size : 212
,
497
,
500
Filter eect (Monochrome) : 161
Fine (Image quality) : 124
Firmware : 458
First-curtain synchronization : 254
Fish-eye eect : 100
,
294
Flash : 246
Eective range : 246
FE lock : 249
Flash control (function settings) : 250
Flash exposure compensation : 254
Flash photography : 246
Manual ash : 253
Red-eye reduction : 251
Shutter synchronization (1st/2nd
curtain) : 254
Slow synchro : 252
Flash exposure compensation : 248
,
254
Flash mode : 253
Focusing → AF
Focus lock : 78
Focus mode switch : 57
Folder creation/selection : 428
Food : 90
Formatting : 435
Formatting (card initialization) : 435
Frame Grab : 268
516
Index
Frame rate : 209
,
445
Full High-Denition (Full HD) (movie) :
207
G
GPS : 398
Grainy B/W : 100
,
294
Grid display : 451
H
Handheld night scene : 92
[HD] 1280×720 (Movie) : 207
HDMI : 240
,
272
,
449
HDMI HDR : 450
HDMI output : 240
HDR art bold : 101
HDR art embossed : 101
HDR art standard : 101
HDR art vivid : 101
HDR Backlight Control : 93
High Frame Rate : 211
High ISO speed noise reduction : 165
Highlight tone priority : 144
Histogram : 314
,
452
Household power : 478
I
ICC prole : 155
Icons : 9
Image browsing (jump display) : 312
Image quality : 124
,
497
Image review time : 129
Images
AF point display : 316
Auto reset : 432
Auto rotation : 433
Continuous (le numbering) : 431
Erasing : 279
File numbering : 430
Histogram : 314
Image review time : 129
Importing (to computer) : 476
Index display : 262
Jump display (image browsing) : 312
Magnifying images : 261
Manual reset : 432
Manual rotation : 277
Playback : 255
Protecting images : 274
Rating : 305
Search conditions : 310
Shooting information : 259
,
509
Slide show : 308
TV display : 272
Image search : 310
Image stabilization : 190
Importing images to a computer : 476
Index display : 262
INFO button : 61
IPB : 209
ISO speed : 140
,
238
ISO Auto range : 496
ISO expansion : 461
Max for Auto : 142
,
238
J
JPEG : 497
Jump display : 312
L
Landscape : 87
Language : 443
Large (image quality) : 124
Lens : 54
,
56
Chromatic aberration correction : 133
Diraction correction : 133
Digital Lens Optimizer : 132
Distortion correction : 131
517
Index
Focus mode switch : 57
Lock release : 55
,
57
Optical aberration correction : 130
Peripheral illumination correction : 131
Lens electronic MF : 185
Location information : 398
Long (bulb) exposures : 114
Long Exposure Noise Reduction : 164
M
Magnifying images : 179
,
187
,
261
Malfunction : 479
Manual exposure : 112
Manual focus : 187
Manual reset : 432
Maximum burst : 126
,
497
Medium (image quality) : 124
Memory cards → Cards
Menu : 65
Dimmed menu items : 69
Display level : 62
Function settings : 426
Movie recording : 198
My Menu : 467
Playback : 256
Setting procedure : 66
Still photo shooting : 119
Wireless communication functions :
320
Menu display : 63
Metering mode : 145
Metering timer : 147
MF (Manual focusing) : 187
MF peaking : 189
Miniature eect : 101
,
103
,
231
,
295
M (Manual exposure) : 112
Monochrome : 157
,
161
Movies : 197
AE lock : 201
Attenuator : 216
Autoexposure recording : 200
Auto slow shutter : 241
Cards that can record movies : 499
Compression method : 209
Editing : 266
,
270
Editing out rst and last scenes : 266
File size : 212
,
500
Frame Grab : 268
Frame rate : 209
Grid display : 451
HDMI output : 240
,
449
Information display : 505
Manual exposure recording : 202
Movie digital IS : 235
Movie recording size : 207
Movie Servo AF : 233
Playback : 263
Recording time : 213
,
500
Sound recording/Sound-recording
level : 215
Time-lapse movie : 217
Video snapshot : 226
Wind lter : 215
MP4 : 209
Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 165
My Menu : 467
N
Night Portrait : 91
Noise reduction
High ISO speed : 165
Long (bulb) exposures : 164
Normal (Image quality) : 124
NTSC : 209
,
445
Number of pixels : 124
,
497
O
One-Shot AF : 170
518
Index
P
PAL : 209
,
445
Partial metering : 145
Part names : 36
Peripheral illumination correction : 131
Photobook set-up : 290
Picture Style : 156
,
159
,
162
Playback : 255
Portrait : 85
Possible recording time (movie) : 500
Possible shots : 496
Power : 52
Auto power o : 438
Battery level : 53
Charging : 44
Household power : 478
Possible shots : 496
Power saving : 438
P (Program AE) : 106
Pressing completely : 59
,
444
Pressing halfway : 59
,
444
Printing
Photobook set-up : 290
Print order : 286
Program AE : 106
Program shift : 107
Protecting images : 274
Q
[Q] (Quick Control) : 71
Quick Control : 71
R
Rating : 305
RAW : 125
RAW+JPEG : 124
,
497
Red-eye reduction : 251
Reduced display : 262
Remote controller : 193
Resizing : 304
Rotating (images) : 277
,
433
Rotating (movies) : 278
S
Safety instructions : 30
Safety shift : 461
Saturation : 160
Scene icons : 79
,
507
Scene Intelligent Auto : 74
Screen : 34
,
51
Angle adjustment : 51
Brightness : 439
SD/SDHC/SDXC cards → Cards
Second-curtain synchronization : 254
Self Portrait : 84
Self-timer : 137
,
214
Sensitivity → ISO speed
Sepia (Monochrome) : 161
Servo AF
Movie Servo AF : 233
SERVO : 170
SERVO (Servo AF) : 170
Sharpness : 160
Shooting information display : 451
,
503
Shooting mode
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 74
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 110
Creative lters : 98
M (Manual exposure) : 112
P (Program AE) : 106
Special scene mode : 82
Switch : 38
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 108
Shutter button : 59
Shutter button functions : 444
Shutter-priority AE : 108
Shutter synchronization : 254
Silent : 94
519
Index
Single-image display : 258
Single shooting : 135
Slide show : 308
Small (image quality) : 124
Smooth skin : 86
Soft focus : 100
,
294
Software : 474
Instruction Manual : 475
Sound recording/Sound-recording level :
215
Special scene mode : 82
Sports : 88
Spot AF : 172
,
177
Spot metering : 145
sRGB : 155
Still image aspect ratio : 127
,
498
Strap : 41
T
Temperature warning : 194
,
242
Tilt correction : 303
Time-lapse movie : 217
Time zone : 440
Tone priority : 144
Toning eect (Monochrome) : 161
Touch beeping : 448
Touch operation : 70
,
260
,
446
Touch Shutter : 167
Toy camera eect : 100
,
295
Troubleshooting : 479
TV display : 272
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 108
U
UHS-I : 11
USB (digital) terminal : 476
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) : 400
V
Video snapshot : 226
Video system : 445
Volume (movie playback) : 264
,
265
W
Water painting eect : 100
,
295
WB (White balance) : 149
White balance (WB) : 149
Ambience priority : 151
Auto : 151
Color temperature setting : 153
Correction : 154
Custom : 152
White priority (AWB) : 151
Wi-Fi function : 319
Airplane mode : 403
Android : 324
Camera access point mode : 387
Camera Connect : 324
,
329
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY : 369
Clearing wireless communication
settings : 404
Connection history : 392
,
395
Edit device information : 347
,
401
EOS Utility : 351
Erase connection information : 402
Image Transfer Utility 2 : 356
iOS : 324
IP address : 387
MAC address : 405
Network : 334
,
352
,
360
Network settings : 421
Nickname : 402
Notes : 418
Pairing : 326
Password : 395
PictBridge : 359
Printer : 359
520
Index
Printing : 361
Print settings : 364
Reconnecting : 392
Remote operation : 329
Resize image : 337
,
342
,
377
Sending all images on the card : 343
,
380
Sending images that match search
conditions : 344
,
381
Send selected : 339
,
376
SSID : 334
,
352
,
360
Switch network : 385
Viewable images : 347
View info screen : 405
Viewing images : 329
Virtual keyboard : 406
Wi-Fi settings : 395
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) : 384
Wind lter : 215
Wireless communication : 319
Z
Zone AF : 173
,
177
521
CT0-D236-B © CANON INC. 2019
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2019. For
information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon Web site.
